000-Za-e-09303_0 Packing and Marking Procedure

JOB

UNIT

274219

000

SPC. 000-ZA-E-09303 TGNN Doc. No. TPLB-SC-ML-03-993

saimexicana saimexicana GASODUCTO TOPOLOBAMPO PIPELINE MEXICO Contract No. 10889

Sh. 2 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL GENERAL

SUMMARY

1

SCOPE AND PURPOSE

3

2

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4

2.1

Client Reference Documents

4

2.2

International standards, regulations, etc

4

2.3

Contractor Reference Documents

4

2.4

Project Reference Documents

4

3

DEFINITIONS

5

3.1

General Document Definitions

5

3.2

Roles

5

3.3

Department And/Or Other Definitions

5

4

RESPONSABILITY

6

5

ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION

7

5.1

7

6

Guideline for packing 5.1.1

Minimum Preparation Requirements By Vendor

7

5.1.2

PO classification and assignment to Inspector

8

5.1.3

Climatic design data

9

5.2

Marking instruction

10

5.3

Packing list general requirements

12

5.4

Storage recommendations recommendations

12

5.5

Method of transport

12

5.5.1

Material originated from North America

12

5.5.2

Material originated from outside North America

13

5.6

Hazardous goods

14

5.7

Over-size and/or over-weight goods

15

ATTA CHMENTS

16

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



1

Sh. 3 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A


SCOPE AND PURPOSE

The following instructions are intended as minimum requirements, and adherence to these instructions in no way absolves or relieves the Vendor of any responsibility or obligation outlined elsewhere in the Purchase Order. Responsibilities will be defined for the Vendor and the Contractor, throughout this Packing & Marking Procedure, providing the minimum requirements for material preparation, preservation and packing. This Packing & Marking Procedure will become an integral part of the conditions of all Purchase Orders generated by Contractor. This procedure must also be applied to suborders placed by Vendors where material/equipment are to be shipped direct to Site. Acceptance of the Purchase Order implies that the Vend or agrees to accept all conditions and will follow all instructions, set forth therein, and that Vendor will reimburse the Contractor for any demurrage, penalties and fines, due to the Vendor’s negligence to comply with these instructions. Aforementioned includes losses or damages due to use of inadequate protective materials, faulty or insufficient packing, improper marking and/or incorrect documentation.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



2

Sh. 4 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A


REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

The Shop Inspection Activities on Vendor workshop shall be based on the applicable Inspection Data Sheet (IDS) and the requirements of the here below listed documents:

2.1

Client Reference Document s

Transportadora de Gas Natural del Noroeste, S. de R.L. de C.V. number 10889

0



2.2 2.2

Document title

Revision

Contract / Agreement

International standards, regulations, etc



Standard number International Standards for Phytosanitary Measures



NOM-011-SCT-2-2012

NOM-012-SCT-2-2008

NOM-040-SCT-2-1995





2.3

Revision 15

Document title Regulation of wood packaging material in international trading (2009) Norma Oficial Mexicana – Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas. Norma Oficial Mexicana – Sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal. Norma Oficial Mexicana – Para el transporte de objetos indivisibles de gran peso y/o volumen, peso y dimension de las combinaciones vehiculares y de las grùas industriales y su transito por caminos y puentes de jurisdicciòn federal.

Contr actor Reference Reference Document s Saipem number

Revision

GTC-COR-MATE-001-E

06

SPC.IB.GEN.0001

04





2.4

Project Reference Document s

Transportadora de Gas Natural del Noroeste, S.A. de R.L. de C.V. number 

Document title General Purchase Conditions for Purchase Order Documents Packaging – The Despatch of Materials & Equipment

Saimexicana number

000-ZA-E-09307



Revision

Document title

A

Special Terms and Conditions for Purchase Order Documents

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



Sh. 5 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A


3

DEFINITIONS

3.1

General General Docum ent Defin Defin iti ons

Client

Transportadora de Gas Natural del Noroeste, S. de R.L. de C.V.

Contractor

Saimexicana S.A. de C.V.

Ag reement reem ent

Agreement means the Agreement 10889 including the Term and Conditions, Schedules and any and all Change Orders entered into between Client and Contractor, all as amended from time to time.

Work

Work means all and any part of the provision of Services and any and all work required to be performed by Contractor to provide the Services pursuant to this Agreement, including but not limited to under a Change Order issued by Transportadora de Gas Natural del Noroeste, S. de R.L. de C.V. and accepted by Contractor hereunder, and as may be modified in writing from time to time, and includes any work that is not expressly described in this Agreement or a Change Order but which is necessary for the proper provision of Services noted above or as may be fairly implied as required to provide such Services.

Purchase Order (PO)

The contractual document issued by Contractor to a Vendor for the purchase of goods and services which defines together with its attachments the duties and obligations of the parties.

Vendor

A company or individual selected to supply goods for the pro ject to whom a Purchase Order is placed.

Job-site

Contractor Yard and Site.

3.2

Roles

PM

Project Manager

TM

Technical Manager

PQM

Project Quality Manager

MM

Project Material Manager

PIC

Project Inspector Coordinator

PLC

Project Logistic Coordinator

3.3 Goods

Departm Departm ent And /Or Other Definit ion s All the equipment/material and services that Vendor is required to p rovide Contractor under the terms of Purchase Order.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana GASODUCTO TOPOLOBAMPO PIPELINE MEXICO Contract No. 10889

4

Sh. 6 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

RESPONSABILITY

Project Dir ector (PD)

The Contractor Project Director is the appointed person responsible for the approval and the Project implementation of this procedure.

Project Qualit y Manager (PQM)

The Contractor’s Project Quality Manager is the appointed person responsible for the control of Vendor QA Management Implementation.

Project Material Manager (MM)

The Contractor’s Project Material Manager is the appointed person responsible for the planning and coordination of the Post-Order activities related to all Project material/equipment from the PO award up to the final delivery to Project jobsite. The Contractor’s Expediter is the Contractor appointed person from Expediting team responsible to follow-up the progress of assigned Purchase Order and to verify the receiving and acknowledge of this specification. The Contractor’s Project Inspector Coordinator (PIC) is the appointed person responsible for the control of Vendor QC Management implementation and coordination with Client for its technical surveillance.

Expediter

Project Inspector Coordi nator (PIC) Inspector

The Contractor’s Inspector is the Contractor appointed person from QC team responsible for the QC status of the assigned Purchase Order.

Contractor Inspection Agency

The Contractor’s Inspector Agency is an appointed QC Agency hired by Contractor to witness on Contractor’s Inspector behalf all or part of witness/spot-witness/hold inspection/test point.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



Sh. 7 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

5

ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION

5.1

Guideline for packing

Packing means to efficiently and effectively protect Goods, from the moment the Goods leave the Vendor factory until they are stored at Job-site and issued for installation/use. The Goods should be packed in accordance with : 

Snamprogetti – General Specification – Packaging – The despatch of materials and equipment - Doc. N°SPC.IB.GEN.0001 – Rev. 04 (Attachment 1 to this specification)

Packaging materials shall be strictly under the requirements of: 

5.1.1

International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures – Revision of ISPM N° 15 – Regulation of wood packaging material in international trading (2009) – (Attachment 2 to this specification)

Minimum Preparation Requirements By Vendor

Packing shall be sufficient to withstand without limitation, rough handling during loading/unloading operations, sea, air and inland transport, exposure to extreme temperature, salt, precipitation during transit, and outdoor storage. Vendor has ultimate responsibility to assure that Goods shall be adequately prepared to provide against entry of dust, fine drifting sand, water, damage, rust, etc. with inner packaging and wrapping, prior to export boxing. This constitutes preparation and packaging of the Goods which includes all pre-crating protection activities, such as application of anti-corrosion coatings, vacuum packing, desiccants, barrier bags, end caps, etc. (Specific lubricants types, inhibitors and other internal detail preservation requirements are Vendor responsibility). Depending on their type, Goods have to be protected against both mechanical damage (shocks, rupture, breakage, loss) and corrosion (rain, salty atmosphere, sand, etc.).  

 









Inner or outer packing will not be returned, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order; High quality wooden cases and/or crates shall be used. Under no circumstances shall Fireboard, Cardboard, or similar cartons be used as outside packing; The metric system for weights and dimensional measurements shall be used; Outside packing must take into consideration risk of exposure to a variety of extreme climatic conditions for inland transport and short & long term storage at the Job-site, Vendor shall take in consideration the climatic data mentioned on the following Paragraph 5.13 “Climatic Design Data”. This protection must be effective for a 18-month period after delivery to Job-site; Vendor is also responsible to ensure proper packing water sealed for the set of the “Product Certificates” shipped along with the goods, if required; Cases weighing more than 136 kgs shall have raised skid platform or pallet base, to permit sling or forklift truck handling; All spare parts, when available at time of shipment of main equipment, must be either packed and clearly marked and included in the main packing case attached to base boards, or if size and dimensions deem separate shipment, then shall be properly protected for storage in accordance with this procedure; Goods subject to corrosion shall be treated with an effective corrosion preventative. All surfaces and parts subject to corrosion must be treated with an appropriate protective compound which can easily be removed.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000









Sh. 8 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Openings in equipment shall be closed by metal sheets, wooden or plastic covers. Sheets and covers shall be firmly attached to equipment or material, i.e. No tape but bolting. All goods shall be completely drained of water, thoroughly dried and cleaned prior to packing and shipment and shall be protected against corrosion. Equipment flange facings, flange facings on piping materials, valves, carbon steel pipes and loose shipped flanges shall be solvent cleaned and treated with a rust prevention compound. Full face covering rubber gaskets will be installed. No service gaskets have to be installed but will be shipped separately. Bolt holes and external surface of the flanges received their normal shot blast and painting, including the blind flanges. Temporary steel blinds will be at least 6 to 8 mm. thickness and painted in a different colour. The temporary steel blinds have to be bolted by at least 4 bolts. No plastic foil and taping of a large flange assemblies is allowed.

In addition to General Specification Packaging N° SPC.IB.GEN.0001 - Rev. 04 the following prescription shall be adopted: 

 

  

 



5.1.2

All ends of straight pipes and fittings shall be covered with plastic end caps securely fixed in order to prevent relevant removal during transportation; All threaded areas shall be adequately greased; Carbon steel (CS) items shall be packed separately from stainless steel (SS) items and/or other high alloy materials; Stainless steel pipe and/or fittings shall be packed in wooden cases; Goods of more than one Purchase Order shall not be packed together in one package; Floating parts shall be packed using proper materials such as waterproof paper, polystyrene blocks, granules and wood wool; Hay, straw or similar vegetable fibres subject to disease or fungus shall not be used in packing; Goods shall be properly secured in the sub-packaging, in such a way that movement in any direction is prevented. Electrical, electronic and similar equipment shall be enclosed in airtight sealed barrier with sufficient quantity of desiccant. The sealing barrier bags, if any, shall be such that the goods can be identified (e.g., by customs authorities) without breaking the sealing.

PO classification and assignment to Inspector

Irrespective of the Incoterms agreed in the Purchase Order, the preparation for export shipping (including Packing) may be subject to inspection by Contractor and Contractor’s Client or appointed representative at Vendor’s shop/factory prior to shipment and at dockside prior to loading aboard ship. Inspection shall not relieve Vendor of any responsibilities or obligations under the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order. Contractor reserves the right to reject any packing found not adequate during inspection, in such cases, Contractor will ask Vendor to immediately repack Goods in acceptable packing at Vendor charge.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



5.1.3

Sh. 9 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Climatic design data

The Project warehouse will be allocated in following location: a) Chihuahua, Chihuahua, Mexico (for the material relevant to Chihuahua Compression Station) b) Los Mochis, Sinaloa, Mexico (for the material relevant to El Oro and Topolobampo Compression Station) Vendor, during the design and preparation of packing, shall remember the following temperature and precipitation as mentioned and highlighted on the Attachment 3 to this document.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



5.2

Sh. 10 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Marking inst ructi on

Vendor is required to correctly mark each package contained within a shipment and detailed within the “Final” Packing List. Labels attached to Goods shall be printed in English and Spanish language. All individual items included in a single packing unit have to be marked separa tely. Stencil on two sides, (long sides), and one end (top) in clear characters at least 5 (five) centimeters high, the marks set out below. If the package does not have sufficient space to apply the shipping marks, metal labels with full shipping marks of proportionate size shall be fixed firmly to the package. The color to be used shall contrast with the package surface (never use yellow or red paint), black paint is recommended. Packages/equipment of five tons or more must be marked with slinging points and also clearly showed on all sides the Centre of Gravity (CoG). This is of paramount importance for Pressure Vessels, Heat Exchangers, Columns and Skid Packages. For hazardous/dangerous or restricted material, Vendor needs to provide additional mark as specified by relevant regulations as per following Paragraph 5.6. Packages containing dangerous Goods have to be marked on at least two sides with appropriate labels in conformity with IMDG/IATA regulations. Chemicals/dangerous Goods shall be identified on a separate invoice, packing list and Bill of Lading, all hazardous Goods shall be identified by the appropriate hazard class and technical or proper shipping name. All spares orders must be clearly marked as spares and shall not be simply included unmarked with main equipment. Shipping mark must appear on all packages and all shipping documents such as Packing List. Bundles and loose items which are not suitable for application of shipping mark direct onto bundles or pieces, must be supplied with indestructible labels/boards bearing shipping mark. Labels/boards are tied firmly to bundles with stainless steel wire. Metal or other weatherproof tags shall be clearly legible and must invariably be affixed to bundles and single units at both ends. Do not use linen, paper or light cardboard tags. Hand lettering with felt tip markers is not acceptable. Precautionary statements will be stenciled on each package to indicate proper handling and storage. All Goods must also bear the following shipping marks:

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



Sh. 11 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Final destination in Mexico will be clearly provided in the Purchase Order. It’s Vendor scope of works and responsibility properly pack and marks in segregate package material for different destination. For the identification of goods subject to special handling, the international handling standard symbols shall be used to ensure proper handling and warehousing (see Attachment 4 to this specification). Special remarks: symbols 15 cm. high to be painted in black, on bright surface. All boxes and crates have to be marked clearly on all four sides: "HANDLE WITH CARE" "RIGHT SIDE UP" All component parts of the Goods, when dispatched in una ssembled status, shall be adequately visible, indelibly marked with identification marks, comprising material and part numbers, which shall also be shown on drawings, to facilitate speedy identification, assembling or dismantling.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



5.3

Sh. 12 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Packing list general requirements

Items numbers shall be listed accurately on the Packing List (Attachment 5 to this specification) to allow proper identification. Packing List shall indicate details of the items packed, piece by piece, accessory by accessory (Purchase Order line item level). Indication of sets, lots, etc. are not allowed if not clearly specifying the single set/lot composition. Monetary value shall never be indicated on any Packing List. In case of different “Final Destination” in Mexico different packing list should be provided in accordance to the “Final Destination” of the Goods. Two copies of the Packing List will be placed in a waterproof envelope and securely fixed outside of each package protected by a plastic or aluminum cover. This cover will be clearly marked “Packing List”, with waterproof ink. One copy of the Packing List that details actual contents and lists any rust prevention agents, removal solutions, should be enclosed in each package.

5.4

Storage recom mendati ons

The Vendor’s packing storage recommendations shall be marked on each package and indicated on the packing list. The symbols for the type of storage to be utilized must be the following: X XX XXX XXXX

: : : :

Crates Crates Crates Crates

or packages or packages or packages or packages

to be stocked outside. to be stocked under cover. to be stocked in covered or closed premises. which must be stocked in air-conditioned premises.

5.5

Method of transport

5.5.1

Material originated from North America

Goods originating inside North America will be transported by either truck or rail. Vendor will package Goods suitable for stacking during the transport, this to take full advantage of the full capacity of the transportation equipment utilised. For truck shipments originating in the United States, Goods must be packed in conformance with the Purchase Order requirements and that the carrier can secure the loads on the truck in conformance with U.S. Code of Regulation 49 CFR 393.100. For truck shipments originating in Canada Goods must be packed in conformance with the Purchase Order requirements and that the carrier can secure the loads on the truck in conformance with the Canadian National Safety Code Standard 10 – Cargo Securement. For truck shipments originating in Mexico Goods must be packed in conformance with the Purchase Order

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



Sh. 13 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

For truck shipments originating in North America Vendor is responsible for providing all necessary blocking and dunnage required to meet the load securement regulation of the origin country. For rail shipments originating in North America Vendors will package the Goods in accordance with American Association of Railway (AAR) load securement rules. Where Vendor uses multiple Sub-vendors to complete goods, all required packing material, blocking, shipping saddles and shipping bunks will be designed for the transport of the Goods from the final assembly point to the Final Destination mentioned in the Purchase Order.

5.5.2

Material originated from outside North America

Shipments from outside North America can expect to be transported by marine, air, road or rail transport and must be packaged accordingly. For shipments by air freight Vendor must be aware that destination airport is : a) Approximately 50 km. far from Chihuahua warehouse b) Approximately 70 km. far from Los Mochis warehouse and Goods will travel by air and truck. The majority of material originating outside North America will be transported first by ship and then by truck or rail. Contractor will utilise as much as possible container ships. Vendor wi ll pack Goods in seaworthy type packing suitable for stuffi ng in containers, packaging must be capable of being stacked insid e containers. Where VENDOR stuffs the container, Vendor must provide all blocking and securement gear for the safe delivery of the Goods at its own expense. Container inspection, loading, securing and limitations will be in accordance with International Standards and Maritime Law & Regulations, regardless of country of export. The use of ocean freight containers as Packing for bulk items (for sea transportation) shall be forbidden, except by prior written approval by Contractor. During the packing activities of Goods for export, Vendor has to take into consideration of the modalities of transport beyond the port of unloading of the marine vessel. Goods will be packaged in compliance with the load securement rules for North American truck or rail shipments.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



5.6

Sh. 14 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Hazardous goo ds

For all chemicals and/or hazardous materials (flammable, toxic, under pressure, radioactive, etc.) the Packing must meet the requirements relating to packing, marking and labeling set out in the most recent report of the following international transportation regulations: 



Board's Standard Advisory Committee on the Carriage of Dangerous Goods in Ships (The Blue Book) for sea freight. Restricted Articles Regulations, laid down by the International Air Transport Association (IATA) for air freight

Furthermore shall be take in consideration the content and requirement stated on: 

NOM-011-SCT2/2012 – Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantitades limitadas (Attachment 6 to this specification).

And in all the Mexican norms, rules and laws herein mentioned. At least within thirty (30) days before the consignment is due t o be dispatched, Vendor must send to the Contracto r the following documents for each product:   

Multimodal Dangerous Goods Form for Sea-freight Transport, filled out in all parts and signed Shipper’s Declaration for Airfreight Dangerous Transport, filled out in all parts and signed Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)

Moreover to provide for :  

IMDG special/specific Packing Proper Dangerous Labeling on the boxes

Hazardous material shall be identified in a separate invoice and packing list to those for non-hazardous material. All hazardous material shall be identified by the appropria te hazard class and technical or prop er shipping name. For hazardous material all invoices, packing lists and/or separate attachment shall contain the following statement: "This is to certify that the above named material is properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labelled, and is in proper condition for transportation according to the appropriate Government or International Transport regulations.

__________________ Name

__________________ Company Name

__________________ Title

__________________ Signature

__________________ Hazardous Class No.

__________________ Technical Shipping Name

Vendor shall produce any necessary hazardous cargo certificates, in accordance with the appropriate Government and International Transportation regulations for all shipments.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



5.7

Sh. 15 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Over-size and/or over-weig ht goo ds

Goods (packing included) will exceed one of the following dimensions and/or weight have to be considered oversize and/or over-weight Goods:

Dimension Length Width Height Gross Weight

Origin North America Mexic o U.S.A. & Canada 13,4 meter 16 meter 2,50 meter 2,59 meter 2,50 meter 2,59 meter 22 metric tons 20,5 metric tons

Origin Outside North Am eri ca 12 meter 2,50 meter 2,50 meter 25 metric tons

If the above-mentioned figures will be exceeded, Vendor must give advance notice to Contractor and shall present to Contractor relevant transport and technical drawings showing the following information: - Purchase Order - Tag number - Weight and dimensions of each piece - Center of Gravity (CoG) - Lifting lugs and/or sling locations - Size of lugs - Saddle locations (incl. w idth, height and w eight) - Size and type of spreader-bars, ropes and shackles (if not included i n Vendor scope of work) - An y specif ic tr ansport requi rements. Electronic copies of technical lifting drawings (also Autocad format, when required) are to be transmitted by Vendor a minimum of 90 days prior to “Ready for Shipment” date. A sample of over-size / overweight cargo drawing is provide as Attachment 7 to this document. Over-size and/or over-weight Goods shall be accompanied with “spreader bars” complete with ropes and shackles whenever required by the Contractor. Vendor will specify each item with lifting and sling points that will distribute the load equally and keep the item in a stable, horizontal position when lifted. Vendor will provide Contractor for each single over-size and/or over-weight Goods a segregate set of “Shipping Documents” (means “Certificate of Origin”, “Shipping Invoice” and “Packing List”). Vendor should furthermore take in consideration the requirement stated on : 



NOM-012-SCT-2-2008 - Norma Oficial Mexicana – Sobre el peso y dimension màxima con los que pueden circular los vehìculos de autotransporte que transitan en las vìas generales de comunicacìon de jurisdicciòn federal (Attachment 8 to this specification) NOM-040-SCT-2-1995 - Norma Oficial Mexicana – Para el transporte de objetos indivisibles de gran peso y/o volumen, peso y dimension de las combinaciones vehiculares y de las grùas industriales y su transito por caminos y puentes de jurisdicciòn federal (Attachment 9 to this specification).

JOB

UNIT

274219

000



6

Sh. 16 of 16 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

ATTACHMENTS 



   

 



Attachment 1 - Snamprogetti – “General Specification – Packaging – The despatch of materials and equipment” – Doc. N° SPC.IB.GEN.0001 Rev. 04 Attachment 2 - International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures – Revision of ISPM N° 15 – Regulation of wood packaging material in international trading 2009 (English & Spanish version) Attachment 3 - Climatic condition for Chihuahua and Los Mochis warehouse Attachment 4 - International Standards Handling Symbols Attachment 5 - Packing list form Attachment 6 - NOM-011-SCT2/2012 – Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantitades limitadas Attachment 7 - Over-size / overweight cargo drawing samples Attachment 8 - NOM-012-SCT-2-2008 - Norma Oficial Mexicana – Sobre el peso y dimension màxima con los que pueden circular los vehìculos de autotransporte que transitan en las vìas generales de comunicacìon de jurisdicciòn federal Attachment 9 - NOM-040-SCT-2-1995 - Norma Oficial Mexicana – Para el transporte de objetos indivisibles de gran peso y/o volumen, peso y dimension de las combinaciones vehiculares y de las grùas industriales y su transito por caminos y puentes de jurisdicciòn federal.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000

SPC. 000-ZA-E-09303 TGNN Doc. No.

saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993

GASODUCTO TOPOLOBAMPO PIPELINE MEXICO Contract No. 10889

Sh. 1 of 113 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 1 Snamprogetti – “ General Specification” – Packaging – The despatch of materials and equipment – Doc. N° SPC.IB.GEN.0001 Rev. 04

$

GENERAL SPECIFICATION PACKAGING THE DESPATCH OF MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT

SPC.IB.GEN.0001 Rev. 4 October 2005

1

$

SPC.IB.GEN.0001 Rev. 4

Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 2 (85)

INTRODUCTION

This specification defines the general requirements for packaging. This specificatian also forms an integral part of the order and the requirements given are the minimum that the packaging must satisfy. Packaging of a different type when prescribed in the order and/or in attached specifications will take precedence over this specification. This specificatians has been prepared in order to gather the types of material handled by the purchaser into uniform groups. Set out under relevant leadings are the requirements for each group. It will therefore be sufficient for the supplier to make up the packaging as required by the purchaser by referring only to the general section of this specification (Chapters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7) and the relevant chapter related to the materials with which he is supplying. Should the supplier be unable to find the equipment he is supplying in this specification, he will be expected to include packaging in his offer, giving a precise description and prices, basing on the general criteria laid down in this specification. For certain materials, the supplier may have his own packaging systems which are more effective and more economic than those described in this specificatian (e.g. metal cages for holding sandwhich panels, special containers for corrosive or radioactive materials, etc.). In these instances the supplier must prescribe his own type of packaging in his offer and give a separate quotation. The use of such proposed packaging is subject to appraval by the purchaser. Packaging will not be returned, unless otherwise specified in the order for special packaging (e.g. containers for radioactive materials).

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 3 (85)

CONTENTS

1.

2.

3.

INTRODUCTION

2

GENERAL

8

1.1.

Purpose of Packaging

8

1.2

Liability

8

1.3.

Packaging by a Company entrusted by the Purchaser

8

1.4.

Customs Inspection

8

1.5.

Classification of Packaging

9

1.6.

Tropical Climates

10

GENERAL RULES

12

2.1.

Dimensians of Packages

12

2.2.

Paints and Protective Material

12

2.3.

Pre-packaging

13

2.4.

Polythene Protection

13

2.5.

Adhesive Tapes

13

2.6.

Metal Ties

13

2.7.

Sealed Containers and Dehydrating Agent

13

2.8.

Loading of Materials in the Cases

14

2.9.

Padding

14

2.10.

Timber and Ply

15

2.11.

Nails and Carton Sealing Staples etc.

15

2.12.

Metal Reinforcement (strips, squares, plates and angles, bolts and ties) see Drawing No. 2

15

CASES

3.1.

17

Cases up to 500 kg and/or dimensions 100 x 60cm (see drawing No. 3).

18

Cases up to 2,000 kg and/or dimensions up to 400 x 150 X 200 cm (see drawing numbers 4 and 5)

18

Cases up to kg 20,000 and/or dimensions up to 600 x 300 x 240 h (see drawing No. 6)

19

3.4.

Marine

19

3.5.

Special Features

20

3.2. 3.3.

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 4 (85)

4.

5.

6.

CRATES, PALLETS, CARTONS, BALES, BARRELS

21

4.1.

Crates (see drawings Nos. 10 and 11)

21

4.2.

Pallets

21

4.3.

Cartons

21

4.4.

Bales and Fastenings

22

4.5.

Metal and PVC Barrels

22

MARKINGS

23

5.1.

External Markings

23

5.2.

Internal Markings

24

5.3.

Signs and Stencils supplied by the Purchaser

24

LIST OF CONTENTS AND PACKING LIST

25

6.1.

List of Contents (see enclosure No. 26)

25

6.2.

Packing List (see enclosure No. 27)

25

7.

AIRFREIGHT PACK AGING

26

8.

SUPPLY CATEGORIES

27

8.1.

Columns – Heat Exchangers – Pressure Vessels and Tubular Equipment including transfer lines for reforming furnaces for ammonia plant.

27

8.2.

Air Coolers

29

8.3.

Machinery

30

Pumps, compressors, steam and gas turbines, gas and diesel engines, speed reducers, mechanical vibrators, bridge cranes ventilators and accessories, including soot blowers and metal parts for burners

8.4.

Electrical and Telecommunication Equipment Electric motors, transformers, power-battery, distribution panels, circuit-breakers, telephone equipment, electrical equipment in general.

32

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 5 (85)

8.5.

Instruments

38

Safety and control valves, instrument and control panels, data loggers, calculators, positioners, tape balances, isntrumentation in general, centralized level and temperature measurement systems for tanks, ditival indicators, analyzers, sampling systems, motor operated valves, rotametet, sequences, electronic computer systems, positive displacement meters, turbine meters, etc.)

8.6.

Cabling

43

Power cabling, isntrument and telecommunications cables, copper and polyethyene multiple tubing, flexible tubes (any material rolled on reels, steel and copper ropes etc.)

8.7.

Pipes and Tubes

44

Pipes and tubes of carbon steel or low alloy steel, also galvanized, internally coated in cement or bitumen, externally lined or bitumenized, painted, of stainless steel, work-hardned copper or aluminium, cast iron, PVC and glass fibre, conduits, for furnaces, exchangers, instrumentation, etc.

8.8.

Fittings

49

Flanges, fittings generally, accessories for tubing and pipes, bends for funace coils, launghing and receiving traps, loading arms.

8.9.

Gaskets and Jointing

55

Gaskets for tubing and pipes, machinery and joints, gaskets in asbestos, rubber, PVC, teflon, metal (spiral-wound and metallic) and plastic, ring joints.

8.10.

Complete Plant Packages

56

Furnaces and boilers, generating sets, water treatment plant, desalinatio plant, air-heating plant, evaporating towers, air and electrostatic filters, etc.

8.11.

Structural Work

61

Steel work generally, metallic structures, sections and grating work, prefabricated tubing (sketches)

8.12.

Linkage and Nuts and Bolt Stud bolts nuts and bolts, metal inserts, etc.

63

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 6 (85)

8.13.

Plate

64

Plate in general, shell-courses for reservoirs, stainless steel and cladded plate

8.14.

Electrodes

66

8.15.

INSULATION

66

Rock and glass wool, insualting materials

8.16.

Asbestos

68

Asbestos products generally

817.

Tiles and cements

68

Ordinary and firebricks, refractory muffles, ordinary and refractory cements

8.18.

Paving, facing and Flooring Materials

69

Paving slabs, facing tiles, moquettes, linoleum

8.19.

Chemical Products

71

Chemical products generally, catalysts, reagents, paints, varnishes, primers, solvents, oils, lubricating greases, bitumens, coal tar, mastics and waterproofing substances, inflammable, hazardous, corrosive, toxic, explosive and radioactive substances

8.20.

Glass Panes

74

8.21.

Office, Laboratory and Surgical Equipment

74

Machines and installations for offices, equipment, utensils, laboratory and surgey apparatus and equipment, analyzers, mixers, scales, microscopes, radiographic appliances and plates, surgical instruments and first aid equipment, glassware generally, cylinders for laboratory and surgery use, cylinders for compressed gases

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 7 (85)

8.22.

Electric Household appliances Anid Canteen Equipment

76

Electrical household appliances generally, cookers, refrigerators, washing machines and dishwashers, television sets, extraction ventilators, etc., freezers, canteen dishwashers, pots and pans, cutlery, crockery, tables, chairs trolleys, furnishings generally, serving and kitchen tables, storage units, slicers, scales, etc.

8.23.

Prefabricated Buildings

79

Huts, prefabricated buildings, sanitary fittings, window and door frames, furnishings, shelves and cupboards

8.24.

Caravans

81

Mobile offices and laboratories

8.25.

Operational Machinery and Appliance

82

Operational machinery and appliances (self-propelled cranes, etc.) road making machinery, (dumpers, excavators, mechanical shovels, cement mixers, etc.) fire engines, lift trucks

8.26.

Miscellaneous – Spare Parts Rubber belts for conveyors, projection models, mechanical books, stationary, photocopy paper, spare parts

Specification referred to in the text: -SPC.ET.MAT.1901

83

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 8 (85)

1.

GENERAL

1.1.

Purpose of Packaging

The purpose of packaging is to safeguard materials during transport, handling and storage against mechanical damage and environmental encroachment (rain, humidity, temperature variations, frost, salty atmospheres, dust, sand, etc.). With certain materials the purpose is also to prevent, wherever possible, theft. Account must be taken of the above factors when making up packaging. 1.2.

Liability

The supplier/packer is responsible for all damage and/or loss during transport and storage due to defects in the packaging or the use of inadequate protective materials. Generally the purchaser will check on these points at the supplier's premises, the port of embarkation or at the forwarders. The supplier/packer will be required to repair packaging himself and at his own expense on location should the purchaser's inspector find that. the packaging is not in accordance with this specification. If the supplier does not act in due course or if the shipment is urgently required, the purchaser reserves the right to have the packaging repaired to meet the present, specification. The costs incurred will be charged to the supplier/packers. Where damage has occured the purchaser may have recourse against the supplier/packer if the insurance company’s claims inspector should repudiate any claims owing to inadequate packaging. 1.3.

Packagi ng by a Company entrus ted by the Purchaser

If packaging is prepared by a firm entrusted by the purchaser, the supplier of the goods must:

1.4.

-

supply the packer with all the necessary instructions for correct packaging of the materials (see this specification and any points contained in the order) and the maximum dimensions of the equipment, from which the overall dimensions can be ascertained;

-

allow free access during normal working hours to his premises for the packaging companies staff;

-

provide a covered working area for the construction of the packaging;

-

provide the packers with lifting equipment and personnel for any necessary dismantling work and for placing the materials into the packaging provided and handling the latter;

-

draw up a packing list (and list of contents if required) and the despatch documents as requested by the order.

Custom s Inspecti on

Customs inspection will normally be requested to be carried out the suppliers and packaging will therefore be left open, and, closed after the customs inspection. If during the customs inspection at the suppliers the packaging and or sealed bags are opened, the supplier must reinstate them including any dehydrating agents. If packaging was undertaken by a packer entrusted by the purchaser, the supplier will still be required to arrange for the packer to reinstate the packaging, the sealed bags and any dehydrating agents.

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 9 (85)

1.5.

Classif icati on of Packagin g

This specification cover the following types of packaging: a) b) c) d) e)

reduced packaging domestic overseas special overseas airmail

a)

reduced packaging This applies to packaging for carriage in the country of origin neighbouring countries or “on site" for construction materials which cannot be damaged through falling during transport, loading, unloading. and handling in store. In this case, packaging limited to the protection of delicate mechanical parts of the equipment using wooden casing, grease, anti-corrosive paints, etc. and the possible dismantling of moveable or delicate parts which can then be placed in boxes or crates according to the instructions given in the relevant chapter.

b)

domestic

This applies to packaging for carriage in the country of origin and neighbouring countries by road or rail, with a limited number of transhipments and storage under cover where required for a maximum period of 6 months. The life of any dehydrating agents used must be at least 8 months. c)

overseas This applies to packaging for carriage by sea and then by road or rail with numerous transhipments. Storage at destination should be regarded as not undercover. The life of any dehydrating agents used must be at least 12 months.

d)

special overseas As paragraph c), with a lengthy sea voyage and/or storage in the open for a period exceeding 6 months in a particularly rough climate (high temperatures and humidity, etc.), the life of any dehydrating agents used must be at least 18 months.

e)

airmail or airfreight This applies to packaging for carriage by air and then by road and rail with a limited number of transhipments and storage undercoyer for a limited period.

The type of packaging to be used will be given in the order.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 10 (85)

1.6.

Tropic al Climates

Steps to be taken when making up packaging for tropical climates. A feature of tropical climates is an atmospheric pressure of 800-1050 mbar, a salt-laden atmosphere. exceptionally frequent and violent cyclones. and storms and rain of long duration. Tropical climates may be divided into two main categories: -

hot-humid (forest and savanna) hot-dry (desert and steppe)

A)

Hot-humid tropical climate -

average temperature 40°C relative humfdityi 92%

Materials and equipment must be protected against insects and mould. The most damaging insects are termites.Wooden packaging must therefore be impregnated with creosote or lined throughout with zinc sheeting. Special field bags of anti-termite type may be used inside the packaging in pIace of zinc sheeting. Mould can develop at between 0° and 50°C when the relative humidity lies between 80% and 100%. The most suitable steps to prevent the development of mould are to use packing materials of an inorganic nature or to treat the surface of the equipment with antimould preparation. The measures to be taken will be specified in the order. B)

Hot-dry tropical climate -

average temperature 55°C relative humidity less than 20% high exposure to sunlight sand and dust storms high temperatures

The high ambient temperature and heavy exposure to sunlight are the predominant factors of this type of climate. The damage caused particularly to machinery, instruments and electrical equipment, etc., is: -

softening and seepage of compounds dessication, shrinkage, and rapid aging of fabrics of organic origin and rubber reduction in the properties of insulating materials.

Non-conductive substances should be used as case padding to avoid these problems. The daily changes in temperature can cause condensation. The smallest grains of dust or sand are the most dangerous (15 u in diameter).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 11 (85)

Damage caused by dust or sand includes: -

increased abrasion on moving parts (bearings, instrument and pivots, etc.) scratching of exposed surfaces (e.g. insulating surfaces become rough and lose their superficial dielectric properties) possible corrosion due to salinity and humidity in the dust and sand themselves.

In order to prevent damage of the above kind, action should be taken as described in Chapter 2.7. (vacuum sealed bags, sealed bags with filter, dehydrating agents, anticorrosive papers, etc.).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 12 (85)

2.

GENERAL RULES

Packaging must be designed to withstand loading and unloading during transport and storage. The strength of the packaging must always be balanced against the weight of the materials contained. The packaging must allow goads to be stacked up a height of 4-5 m. The packaging must be able to withstand movement on board railway wagons etc. 2.1.

Dimensio ns of Packages

In order to reduce the need for special transportation to the minimum the supplier should, even at the design and construction stage, limit the dimensions of the equipment, taking account of packaging, to within the standard clearance gauges for roads and railways (drawing No. 1). The following examples are the maximum dimensions. far carriage within Europe: Vehicle clearance length - 11.50 m x breadth 2.50 m x height 2.50 m railway clearance length - 14.00 m x breadth 3.10 m x height 2.10 m (2.95 m) maximum weight 20.000 kg ( * ) The person making up the packaging (supplier or specialist company) must conform to these requirements. If the above limits have to be exceeded, the supplier or packer must give advance warning to the purchaser's transport department so that due arrangements can be made for transportation (permits, suitable transport, etc.) If transportation of the packaged equipment is to be undertaken in a covered vehicle the clearance is reduced to the following limits: width m 2.40, height m 2.30. (*)

2.2.

This weight limit must be checked in relation to the country of origin, the countries of transit and the country of destination.

Paints and Protecti ve Material

Finished surfaces subject to rusting and corrosion must covered, by spraying or dipping, with easing removable protective material, proof against hydrocarbons and water and compatible with the materials and surfaces to be protected. The supplier or the packaging firm must indicate the useful life of the protective material and provide any further information relating to proper safekeeping of the material and the method of removal. These indications may be printed directly on the protection or placed on cards fixed to the material itself. No protective materials may be used on parts of switches, rotors, distributors, brushes, terminals, connectors, or other non-metallic parts such as friction discs, brakes, rubber, fabric or leather, where their functioning precludes the use of such materials. Care must be taken that the protective material is dry before packaging is proceeded with.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 13 (85)

This also applies to carriage undertaken using reduced packaging. All metal parts used in packaging other than nails must be painted with anti-rust compound as a minimum requirement. All protected surfaces must be insulated from contact with wood or other hydroscopic materials by wax or polythene paper or other similar products. In special cases and with the prior consent of the purchaser, impregnated paper may be used for covering surfaces and materials subject to corrosion. These products have the advantage of being easily and quickly removed. The choice of protective substances is left to the supplier, who will be held liable for corrosion damage caused to materials. The useful life of protective materials will be stated in the order. 2.3.

Pre-packaging

Items must be correctly prepared, irrespective of the type of packaging used. For this purpose, any moveable parts must be fixed to the body of the equipment and any delicate parts must be protected. If the equipment has sharp edges, these must be covered with a soft material so as not to tear the protecting covering (sealed bag and/or polythene). All accessories liable to damage must be dismantled and packaged separately. All outlets and openings into the equipment must be carefully seated and/or covered. Where equipment. is particularly delicate and susceptible to the climate, dehydrating agents must be enclosed. Small items must be classified, identified, quantified, weighed, and placed according to type into waterproof paper bags, sacks. etc. 2.4.

Polythene Protecti on

As a minimum requirement, items within cases must always be covered with a polythene bag opened at the base to allow for air circulation. Sealed polythene container may not be used to protect materials against humidity. Polythene sheeting must be arranged to keep the contents dry from rain, during carriage by lorry, rail or ship. The polythene sheets used must be of 0.20 mm minimum thickness and reinforced to withstand the effects of sun and heat. 2.5.

Adhesi ve Tapes

Adhesive tapes used in packaging must be of a type resistant to weathering, light and solar heat. 2.6.

Metal Ties

Bundles of steel work should be wrapped with galvanized steel strip, held by clamps. 2.7.

Sealed Containers and Dehydrating Agent

Where prescribed and far items particularly subject to deterioration as a result of humidity (swithchboards, electric equipment, instrumentation, oil-bearing apparatus, etc.) heat-insulated containers complying to US standard MIL B-131 F Class 1 must be used. To maintain the humidity inside the container at 35% dehydrating agents complying with us standard MIL D-3464 D, must be placed in the container.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 14 (85)

The container must be sealed immediately after the dehydrating agent has been introduced. By way of guidance, the quantity required to maintain a degree of humidity of less than 35% for about 1 year is stated to be: ½ unit x m² of surface of packaging The wrapping must be such as to avoid the possibility of water collecting on the wrapping (i.e. to avoid water penetrating the wrapping through gravity if it is torn). An important condition for maintaining a long-term atmosphere of low humidity within the sealed bag in addition to inserting dehydrating agents is to create a partial vacuum. Using a normal suction pump, the air inside the sealing bag can be reduced by 70 - 80%. The hole left open for this purpose can then being hot-sealed. It is inadvisable to create too great a vacuum in the bag which will cause it to adhere to the apparatus and be torn. Where apparatus is to be fixed to the base of the case or crate, rubber packings should be fitted against the holes (the number of holes must be kept to the minimum) and the sealed bag thereby preventing humidity entering through these holes. To allow for checks on the humidity conditions, a window must be made (20 x 20 cm) in the upper part of the sealed bag, with transparent PVC 0.20 mm thick, hot-sealed to the sealed bag and capable of resisting atmospheric agents. Inside and tied to the apparatus and positioned so that it can be seen through the window, a small bag (1/2 unit) of dehydrating agent will be placed. Several blue coloured lines are stamped in special ink on the wrapping of this bag. The ink functions like litmus paper. If the blue of the lines turns to pink, the atmosphere inside the sealed bag is excessively humid and the dehydrating agent must be replaced. The sealed bag must then be repaired or replaced. The window also facilitates customs inspection without the bag being opened and repairs having to be made. 2.8.

Loading of Materials in the Cases

The materials must be loaded in the cases or in the containers in such a way as to reduce the volume of the packaging to a minimum. Bathening will also prevent the material from moving inside during transit. The purchaser reserves the right to refuse packaging that does not comply with the above requirements. All apparatus with a base (machines generally, switchboards, control panels, etc.) must be bolted to the base of the case and/or crate with rubber gaskets in between to avoid mechanical contact. Battens and supports must be used to ensure that the equipment is held firm. 2.9.

Padding

Once the equipment is fitted inside the case, provision must be made to protect the fragile parts and to fill the empty spaces, where necessary, with inert non-hygroscopic padding, e.g. expanded polystryne, cushions, blocks, pellets, strips, etc.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 15 (85)

2.10.

Timber and Ply

The timber to be used for constructing packaging must meet the following requirements: -

quality

:

solid deal, seasoned and without defects that might weaken it;

-

knots

:

limited number and dimensions. They must be solid and integral with the boarding;

-

boarding

:

width 12 cm min - 25 cm max..

The walls and coverings of the cases {especially those for overseas and special overseas type packaging) may be made of marine ply (Douglas Fir ply, bonded with phenolic glue). Second-hand timber must not be used. 2.11.

Nails and Carton Sealin g Staples etc.

Nails must be of the flat head type and must be of sufficient lenght to enable them to be bent over. Where it is not possible to bend them, but a strong joint is required, spiral nails or staples must be used. Metal staples may be used in conjunction with ply. The metal staples must be surface treated (e.g. copper plated) to prevent them from corroding. 2.12.

Metal Reinforc ement (strip s, squares, plates and angles, bolt s and ties) see Drawing No. 2

Strips The following types of strips can be used: -

plastic hardened and coated steel surface-treated hardened steel (e.g. copper plated or galvanized) stainless steel

Annealed materials may not be used. The strip must be applied properly stretched with an appropriate device and closed with steel clips surface treated as the strip or made of the same material. The corners of the boxes at the points where the strips pass over them, must be reinforced with steel angles to avoid cutting into and consequent slackening of the strip. Squares All cases and crates over 1,000 kg in weight must be provided with a minimum of 3 angle squares per corner and distributed one far each horizontal external brace.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 16 (85)

Steel plates and angles Cases and crates over 2.000 kg in weight must be provided with steel plates at the handling points and steel angles on the upper corners to avoid abrasion and breakage caused by ropes. The angles must be at least 1 mm thick and the corner of the case must be chamfered for the ed corner of the angle. Bolts and ties Bolts will be used to connect the boarding of the bottom of the case and/or crate to the bearing blocks and for creating saddles and braces. Ties may be made of 5 mm diameter galvanized steel twisted rod or with a small plate or metal wire, held taught by stretchers.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 17 (85)

3.

CASES

Cases for packaging of domestic, overseas and special overseas type will normally be of the same kind of structure. The differences between the various types being: -

the joining of the boards; the thickness of the boards, the reinforcement and the base blocks; internal protection.

The common structural characteristics will be explained below, and the details of each type of packaging will then be listed. The cases must always allow for handling by fork lift truck; they must therefore be provided with battens which allow the forks to pass at right angles beneath the longest side. Base boards must be simply fined. The base must not be covered with tarred paper or polythene to allow for ventilation and water drain from the container. The base structure (flats and boards) must be such as to equally distribute the weight of the apparatus. Destination countries with a heavy or prolonged snowfall Cases and crates sent to countries with a heavy or prolonged snowfall must not have battens underneath which could be used as funners permitting the container to as a sledge. Such a feature if required will be specified in the order. A pulling device must also be placed at each end of the parcel. Categories For practical reasons, the cases and crates are subdivided into three categories: Horizontal bracing

These, may be external or internal (American type}. The dimensions and spacing will be proportionate to the dimensions and weight of the case. By way of example: 10 x 2.5 cm to 15 x 3 cm section with a maximum spacing of 80 cm. Cases in the category up to 2.000 kg can be divided into two types distinguished only by the bracing of the Cover. TYPE A - with external bracing (see drawing No. 4), measurements up to 200 x 100 x 200 cm. The width may be increased by 150-200 cm by inserting 2 or more longitudinal planks between the cover and the stiffening.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 18 (85)

TYPE B - with external bracing (see drawing No. 5), measurement up to 400 x 150 x 200 cm. In this case, depending on the width of the, case, 1 or more boards may be inserted between the cover and the stiffening to underpin the staves, of the cover. 3.1.

3.2.

Cases up to 500 kg and/or dim ension s 100 x 60cm (see drawing No. 3).

Carryiing built crossed bars

Where the contents permit cases may be without base slats, these will be replaced bars by carrying crossbars to permit movement with a fork lift truck and will also serve as a batten for lifting ropes. Minimum dimensions of the base bars: 6 x 10 cm. The carrying crossbars on the boarding and on the cover must have minimurn dimensions of 10 x 2.5 cm.

Planking

Planking must be 2/2.3 cm thick.

Base

Base planks must be 3 cm thick.

Bands

Each case must be bound with at least two bands.

Cases up to 2,000 kg and/or dimens ions up to 400 x 150 X 200 cm (see drawin g numb ers 4 and 5)

Base blocks

Cases must be provided with battens on the bottom parallel to the longitudinal access. The dimensions of the battens as follows: 10 x 10 cm or a weight up to 1.000 kg 12 x 12 cm or a weight up to 2.000 kg spacing approx. 60 cm. The section and the space between must be proportionate to the structural characteristics, dimensions and weight of the product. The ends of the slats must bevelled at 45° to allow for the positions of ropes and for moving on snow.

Slats

Slats 8 cm thick should be placed crossways beneath the beams, raise the package for lifting ropes or to allow movement with a fork lift truck. The position and number of the slats will be determined in accordance with the length of the case and the relative centre of gravity. The slats must be about twice as wide as they are thick and may be fixed by screw (preferred), nails or staples.

Base

The base boarding must be 4 cm thick and be bolted or screwed to the base crossbars.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 19 (85)

3.3.

Planks

Planks must be laid vertically so as to achieve improved resistance to superimposed weights.

Stiffening struts

Stiffening struts must be placed immediately struts beneath the cover (10 x 4 cm minimum and 80 cm minimum spacing). Since their object is to protect the container against the pressures imposed by the lifting ropes, the dimensions of the struts must be proportionate to the weight of the package and to its size.

Base

The base boarding must be at least 5 cm thick and be bolted or screwed to the base beams.

Cover

The cover of these cases must be supported by a lattice frame (section approx. 15 x 3 cm). The squares or rectangles in the lattice may not exceed 40/50 cm at the side, to obtain a sufficiently resistant cover.

Horizontal bracing

This may be external or internal (American type). Section 20 x 4 cm (80 cm max spacing).

Cases up to kg 20,000 and/or dimens ions up to 600 x 300 x 240 h (see drawing No. 6)

Planking Bottom boards

3 cm for domestic, overseas and special overseas type packaging. Closed tight and of the following dimensions: 12 x 12 cm for weights up to 6,000 kg. 15 x 15 cm for weights up to 9,000 kg 20 x 20 cm for weights up to 20,000 kg weight of contents up to 500 kg weight of contents up to 2,000 kg weight of contents up to 20,000 kg and over (*)

(*)

3.4.

In the case of exceptional and particularly cumbersome packages (e.g. apparatus weighing 20,000 kg and over), the purchaser will consult the supplier/packer to agree the most appropriate type of packing.

Marine

The walls and cover of the cases may also be made of marine ply with an internal deal frame (as illustrated in drawing No. 7). The structural criteria is as stated for cases constructed with solid board. In practice, the walls and cover may be formed of a squared or rectangular lattice frame, onto which the marine ply can be placed externally. The dimensions of the frame will be proportionate to the dimensions and weight of the apparatus (50 x 70 cm max). Stiffening slats and a cross-ties must be provided where necessary. Polythene must be inserted beneath the cover.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 20 (85)

Dimensions are as follows:

3.5.

-

Frame section 12 x 4 cm for weights up to 2,000 kg 12 x 5 cm for weights up to 10,000 kg 15 x 5 cm for weights up to 20,000 kg c

-

Ply- thickness 10 mm for weights up to 2,000 kg 13 mm for weights up to 10,000 kg 15 mm for weights up to 20,000 kg

Special Features

The special features distinguishing the various types of cases into domestic, overseas and special overseas type are as follows: 3.5.1.

Domestic Type Packaging Planking and cover The planking and cover may be made using and simple joints. The maximum permitted distance between the boards must not exceed 1 mm.

3.5.2.

Packaging of Overseas and Special Overseas Type Joints

Joint will be of the tongue and groove type at least 11 mm deep (see drawing No. 8).

Ventilation holes

Several holes 10 mm diameter placed from down upward going from out inwards, must be drilles in the upper part of the boarding to permit ventilation.

Internal lining

highly impermeable tarred paper able to with stand strong temperature fluctuations independent of the protection used for the container. The tarred paper must be fixed down with metal staples surfacetreated against rust. The joints of the tarred paper must be made by overlapping and sealing with adhesive tape.

Cover

The cover must be lined internally with polythene sheet (top) and a sheet of tarred paper (bottom) (see drawing No. 9). It has been found that water penetrating the cracks in the cover and lying on the polythene sheeting and tarred paper form depressions which eventually spill into the case. To avoid this problem, the following steps can be taken: -

increasing the framework used to support the cover or tie in such a way that the polythene cannot leak in water;

-

insert a sheet of hardboard or marine ply (5 mm) on top of the support for the cover.

In this way, any deforming of the lining can be avoided.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 21 (85)

4.

CRATES, PALLETS, CARTONS, BALES, BARRELS

4.1.

Crates (see draw ing s Nos. 10 and 11)

The criteria to be adopted for wooden crates as to the thickness of the planks and reinforcement of the structure are identical to those applying to cases. Crates must be built in such a way that the planks and spaces between are equal. The base must be fully timbered. Inside the crates, the equipment must always be covered with a polythene mantle treated to withstand ultraviolet light and heat, and with protection against any infiltration of rainwater (arrange the sections by as for roof tiles). The angles of the crate must be reinforced (see drawing No. 2). 4.2.

Pallets

Where prescribed pallets will always be of the non-returnable type. The dimensions will be agreed from time to time taking into account the various special requirements either from the transportation aspect or from the equipment to be carried. Poplar wood may be used for building pallets. 4.3.

Cartons

Various types of cartons are available in the trade. Four types will be considered in this specification Standard corrugated card Such cartons are made from a single card of double wall thickness which must be at least 8/10 mm thick. The cartons will be closed by means of metal staples, adhesive tape and metal or plastic strips. As a general rule, this type of carton will be used for packaging of the domestic type. Oiled corrugated car This type of carton offers moderate protection against humidity and is preferred to the first type even for domestic type packaging. It may be closed by means of metal staples, tape and strip. Bitumized card These cartons are made of strong compac bitumenized card , double-walled, 2/3 mm thick. They give good resistance to humidity and are recommended for packing of the overseas type and containers. The sides and base must be closed with metal while the cover must be fixed down with strong adhesive tape. The cartons must be bound with steel or nylon tape.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 22 (85)

Multi-layered wall card These cartons are particularly strong and resistant to humidity, being composed of various layers of natural long-fibred kraft, 14 mm thick. They enable equipment weighing up to 300/400 kg to be packaged and relatively heavy loads to be stacked on them. They are principaly used for packaging of the overseas type and containers. This type of carton, too, must be sealed with adhesive tape and steel strip and polythene. Protective angles must be fixed to the carton to avoid the steel strip etc. from cutting into the carton. The cartons, (whatever the type), must be equipped with other crossties or pallets depending on the dimensions and weight of the materials contained. The crossties or pallets must be connected to the cartons by steel strips etc. 4.4. 4.4.

Bales and Fastenin Fastenin gs

Bates will be fastened using galvanized steel wire (diameter 5 mm) with a metal hoop or galvanized steel cable. Wood packing or other material must be inserted between the steel wire or the hoop and the bale to absorb part of the pull of the fastening and prevent the contents of the bare coming apart. The number of fastenings will depend on the weight and length of the bale but must not be more than 1.30 mm apart. No bale may exceed 1,000 kg in weight. 4.5.

Metal and PVC Barr els

Barrels with a capacity of less than 100 litres will be packaged in crates or arranged on pallets protected with a heat-shrunk cover and crosshoops. Barrels with a capacity of or greater than 100 litres will be sent individually.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 23 (85)

5.

MARKINGS

5.1. 5.1.

External Markings

Each parcel must be marked as indicated below on at least 3 sides in indelible paint, resistant to weather effects and light. The size of the marking must be proportionate to the size of the individual parcel but not to be less than 2.5 cm high. On other parcels or loose parts where paint cannot be applied, the marking will be on galvanized and/or enamelled plates of suitable dimensions, at least 30 x 40 cm, welded, fastened or nailed to the parcels or parts. At least 3 for each parcel, including 1 on the cover. To avoid the plates becoming detached, please apply them before the case is closed in such a way that the nails can be bent over. Galvanized steel nails and wires must be used for fastening the plates. Care must be taken not to damage any sealed bags etc. that may have been used. Marking will normally indicate the following information: -

Consignee Consignment destination Plant (name) Order number and modification, if any Parcel N° 1/ ………2/…….. * Gross and net weight Dimensions Special handling requirements (see below)

*

The parcel number is expressed a fraction in which the numerator indicates the actual number of as the parcel and the denominator represents the total amount of parcels in the batch.

The language for the markings will be indicated in the order. The following are examples of special handling instructions: -

Top, bottom. this side up Fragile, handle with care Keep dry, keep away from cold Keep in a cool place, refrigerated Danger corrosive, explosive, radioactive substances.. etc. Centre of gravity (for parcels of approx. 1,000 kg and over) Slinging points (for parcels of approx. 1,000 kg and over).

The above instructions must be accompanied with the appropriate symbols (arrows. glasses, umbrella. etc.).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 24 (85)

The supplier must indicate, indicate, in consultation with the. purchaser, the storage requirements by marking each parcel wi with th the letters: A-B or C as follows: “A” “B” “C"

-

to indicate closed store to indicate under cover to indicate in the open

For some orders special signs will be prescribed e.g. a triangle enclosing the customer’s symbol, the order number and the place of destination. These instructions will each case appear on the order in the “markings” box. Cases, crates or containers must not show old markings. The packer is responsible for marking the crates etc. and will be hold responsible for any damage resulting from wrong or inadequate marking. 5.2. 5.2.

Internal Markings

The same importance given to external marking must also be attached to the internal marking on the packaged equipment. All parts, boxes, packets and bags inserted in cases, crates or containers must be clearly marked making reference to the item or positioning as indicated on the order and to the equipment to which it will be fitted. 5.3. 5.3.

Signs and Stencils supp lied by the Purchaser

In the case of certain orders where a language with non-Latin characters is prescribed (Russian, Arabic, etc.), the purchaser pu rchaser may provide the Packing Company with signs or plates plat es for marking purposes. Such a procedure will be indicated in the order. It will therefore be up to the supplier to indicate his requirements as soon as possible to avoid delays in delivery of the equipment owing to marking problems.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 25 (85)

6.

LIST OF CONTENTS AND PACK ING LIST

6.1. 6.1.

Lis t of Contents of Contents (see encl encl osur e No. 26) 26)

The list of contents is a description of the materials contained in a package. A copy (in a sealed polythene envelope) will be inserted inside the case and a second on the outside protected by a galvanized or enamelled plate fixed with galvanized nails bent over on the inside. The requirement to prepare list of contents and the language to be used will be indicated in the order. In the case of supplies sub-divided into numerous parcels, which may be opened at different times, the supplier must compile a list of contents in order to facilitate assembly work. These lists need to be sent to the purchaser. 6.2. 6.2.

Packing Lis t (see enclos ure No. 27) 27)

This document is the complete list of the supplies. It must be drafted in the language prescribed in the order and must always indicate: -

the complete markings (as prescribed in Chapter 5.1) the equipment abbreviation (if provided) quantity and type of parcels short description of the equipment, quantity and number of order items, parcel by parcel gross and net weights, partial and total dimensions/volume

An example of the packing list will normally be attached to the order. A copy of the packing list in a polythene envelope must be inserted inside each case and/or crate. A second copy will be fixed firmly to the outside of the parcel, protected by a galvanized or enamelled plate, marked ”DOCUMENTS". A packing list must also be sent, in the number prescribed in the order, to the purchaser's Despatch Office (unless stated otherwise in the order).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 26 (85)

7.

AIRFREIGHT PACK AGING

When a tender indicates airfreight type packaging, this must be included in the price and described in the offer. This specification does not contain detailed instructions for airfreight type packaging. The supplier must howewer take note of the information in the following: -

general rules markings packing list

As a general rule, the supplier must ensure that: -

the equipment is properly secured in the case and/or carton (by fixing materials and padding);

-

the equipment (if necessary) is protected against humidity by the use of a sealed bag and dehydrating agents

-

the packaging is robust and also light and non-bulky, able to withstand handling and transit;

-

the package does not spoil or damage other goods in transit;

-

the markings are legible, complete and permanent, as prescribed in the section on "markings".

If fragile materials are concerned or if special care is required either in handling or for protection against the environment (cold, heat, humidity, dryness, etc.), the instructions to be followed must be indicated in writing on at least 3 sides. Where flammable, corrosive, radioactive, etc. substances are concerned, appropriate plates must be fitted on each side. In this case, the supplier must also certify the degree of hazard of the materials. Such certification must be advised to the purchaser to allow the Despatch Office to decide, in consultation with the airline, whether the supplies can be sent in one batch or in several. The maximum acceptable dimensions of the parcels will obviously depend on the type of aircraft used and the destination. For parcels of dimensions exceeding: 210 x 105 x 90 cm the supplier must consult the purchaser's Despatch Office to agree on any special requirements.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 27 (85)

8.

SUPPLY CATEGORIES Special Instruct ions.

8.1.

Column s – Heat Exchangers – Pressure Vessels and Tubular Equipment incl udin g transfer lines for r eforming furnaces for ammonia plant.

Instructions covering all types of packing. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer/packer to adopt the most suitable methods for preventing the equipment from becoming damaged in transit. In the case of equipment dispatched in sections (columns, transfer lines, etc.) of a diameter in excess of 1.50 m, metal crosspieces must be provided to prevent any deformation and to protect the ends to be welded. Item used for protection or reinforcement must not be welded to the equipment. The slinging on lifting points on the equipment must be indicated in indelible paint to ensure correct handling. Exchangers must be prepared for dispatch in accordance with TEMA standards (section 3-G6). Expansion joints or expansion U bends on exchangers must be protected by means of galvanized sheeting hold in place by galvanized steel wire or steel cable. Unless otherwise specified in the order the equipment in this section will be despatch unpainted with preservations. If the order stipulates that the shell is to be treated wit anti-corrosive and/or painted, the equipment must be handled wit particular care, with the use of hemp ropes, canvas slings, rockers or other suitable means. Before the equipment is stored, both at the manufacturer’s works or during the various stages of transport or at the installation site, the storage area must be properly drained and cleared of stones or items with sharp edges. 8.1.1.

Packing for domestic consignments Planking

For equipment up to 2,50 m diameter covering short distances, it is sufficient to use planking and wooden wedges. They must be firmly fastened to the equipment by means of galvanized steel stays or steel rape. The dimensions of the planking must be sufficient to ensure that no part of the equipment touches the loading surface.

Saddle mountings

For equipment of over 2.5 m diameter and where long distances are involved, saddle mountings must be used (see drawing No. 12). Saddles must be arranged in such a way that the height of the vessel above the ground is kept to the minimum, and must be fitted with a stay-rod in galvanized or coated steel and stiffeners before mounting. The centre to centre distance between saddles must be adjusted in each case, according to the characteristics of the equipment and the requirements of the mode of transport being used (road, rail or sea). If equipment is already fitted with metal saddles wooden supports must be provided of the same length as the

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 28 (85)

metal saddles. The section is proportional to the weight of the equipment, but must not be less than 5 x 29 cm. Flanges and outlets

Flanges and outlets must be covered with wooden discs {nautical plywood), either either bolted or tied to the flanges (drawing No. 13) and sealed with weather-resistant adhesive tape. On equipment made of stinless or plated steel, flanges and outlets must be protected with a soft rubber gasket (5 mm min.) and a disc (3 mm min.) bolted to the flange or outlet to ensure a complete watertight joint (drawing No. 14).

Transfer line heads

8.1.2.

Transfer line heads fitted with a manhole must be protected by a nautical plywood disc (2 cm in thickness) bolted to the equipment (drawing No. 16).

Overseas type packing Saddle mounting

As for domestic packing, but in all cases wooden saddle mountings (drawing No. 12) must be provided.

Flanges

Flanges and outlets must be protected with a soft rubber gasket (5 mm min.) and a disc (3 mm min. ) bolted to the flange or outlet to ensure a complete watertight joint and sealed with adhesive tape resistant to sea-water (drawing No. 15).

Transfer line heads

As 8.1.1.

Moisture absorptive salts

To prevent internal surfaces from becoming oxydized, a sufficient quantity of a moisture absorptive agent must be placed inside the equipment, the quantity to depend on the surface area of the equipment (see 2.7.). The container (a gunny bag or similar) will be attached to the disc or discs for sealing the outlets. The outlet or outlets to which the absorbent agent has been attached will be indicated.

For equipment up to 1.50 m diameter dispatched in sections for assembly at the construction site, covers in nautical plywood must be provided, bolted down and secured with a wrapping of adhesive tape. These covers are intended to protect the ends prepared for welding and the inside of the equipment. If this protection cannot be provided in wood, the following measures must be adopted: -

the ends to be welded must be protected by means of U sections of synthetic material, secured to the shell inside and outside with adhesive tape resistant to agents in the atmosphere;

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 29 (85)

-

8.2.

the inside wall must be protected by an application of a highly resistant anti-corrosive agent which can be removed on arrival at destination, and compatible with the chemical properties of the fluid to be used in operating.

Air Coolers

Instructions covering all types of packing.

8.2.1.

8.2.2.

Finned tubing

Fin surfaces must be protected on both sides with a layer of galvanized sheet 1 mm thick, suitably attached to the cleat of the bale. In no cirmustances must anything be welded to the galvanized parts of the equipment. Finned tubes must be suitably separated from one another by spacers to protect them during loading and unloading operations.

References to assembly asseminstructions drawings

All parts will bear reference numbers in indelible white paint relating to the bly instructions drawing.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Crates

Refrigerating units, hoods, pre-assembled structural work, tube nests and air locks (unless already mounted on the tube nests) are to be packed in crates (see 4.1.). No part must be allowed to project outside the crate.

Bundles

Individual structural elements will be dispatched in bundles (see 4.4.).

Cases

The detached parts of refrigerating units, such as hubs, driving shafts, bearings, etc. are to be suitable protected and packed in cases; as prescribed in sections 1 - 2 and 3.

Flanges and outlets

As 8.1.1.

Overseas type packing Flanges and outlets Moisture absorptive salts Crates Bundles

As 8.1.1. As 8.1.2. As 8.2.1. As 8.2.1.

Cases

The detached parts of refrigerating unit, such as hubs, driving shafts, bearings, etc., are to be packed in cases (see section 3). Before being placed in the cases, parts must be carefully greased and wrapped in anti-corrosive waxed paper and/or in containers designed to protect them from humidity, dust and agents in the atmosphere.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 30 (85)

8.3.

Machinery

(Pumps, compressors. steam and gas turbines, gas and diesel engines, reduction gears, mechanical vibrators, bridge cranes, ventilators and accessories, including soot blowers and metal parts of burners). Instructions covering all types of packing. Connections

All auxiliary threaded connections (connections for oil, gas, drainage, gauges, thermostats, breather pipes etc.) must always be hermetically sealed by means of threaded metal plugs, and well greased. Plastic or rubber plugs may not be used unless they are secured by adhesive tape.

Auxiliary tubing

All auxiliary tubing supplied loose (i.e. not already mounted on the equipment) must carry a metal identification label with the reference number of the appropriate assembly instructions drawing. The ends must also be sealed off with protective plugs secured by means of adhesive tape. The base of the equipment must be firmly secured to the bottom of the case by means of nuts and bolts and battens, which must be nailed to the walls of the case itself.

Base fixing

8.3.1.

Moving

Any moving parts i.e. shafts, lever mechanisms of turbines, etc. must be firmly secured en the equipment so that they cannot move.

Electric motors

Unless otherwise stipulated, drive motors will normally be dispatched mounted on the common base.

Special measures

Any special packing arrangements, for individual equipment will be stipulated in the order.

Bridge cranes

The structural framework for bridge cranes is to be dispatched in accordance with the instructions given in 8.11 (structural work). This section describes the protective measures to be taken regarding the equipment, its idifferent parts, as well as auxiliary and accessory items.

Packing for Domestic consignments Crates

The type of packing generally to be used , for machinery is a wooden crate. The equiprnent must be protected inside the crate by means of a polyethylene cover (0.20 mm thick).

Cases

When the machine is coupled to the motor or to non-waterproof electrical appliances (not intended for installation in the open) it must be packed in cases of wood or nautical plywood.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 31 (85)

8.3.2.

Flanges

Flanges must be protected and covered with discs in plastic, wood or galvanized sheet, attached as shown in drawing No. 13 and sealed with good quality adhesive tape.

Machined parts

All machined parts, susceptible to wear, will be protected by grease, which must be effective six months. Materials that are inflammable or contain solvents must not be used.

Detached parts

AlI detached parts accompanying the machine, such as oilers, level indicators, flow inspections holes, mechanical seals, maintenance kits, spare parts, etc., must be given a protection of grease, wrapped separately in anti-corrosive waxed paper. Identification labels bearing the item number of the machine to which they belong must be attached to each item. They must then be packed separately (even if placed in the same crate or case as the machine itself) in containers of foamed polystyrene and board. For instruments see section 8.5.1.

Overseas Type Packing Cases

The type of packing used for machinery will be a wooden case.

Protective bag

Machinery must be enclosed in a bag with a protective lining containing a moisture absorptive agent as prescribed in 2.7.

Flanges

Machines will be made waterproof through sealing of all outlets. Flanges of compressors, turbines, expanders, etc., must be protected by steel discs (minimum thickness 3 mm) and rubber gaskets (minimum thickness 5 mm) as per drawing No. 14.

Machined parts

All machined parts will be protected by special grease and wrapped in anti-corrosive waxed paper. Materials that are inflammable or contain solvents must not be used.

Detached parts

As for packing for domestic consignments (8.3.1.), with the addition that the containers of foamed polystyrene and board will be enclosed in a protective bag with a moisture-absorptive agent and packed in overseas type cases. For instruments see section 8.5.2.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 32 (85)

8.4.

Electric al and Telecomm unic ation Equipment

(Electric motors, transformers, power-battery, distribution panels, circuit-breakers, telephone equipment, electrical equipment in general). By electrical equipment in general is meant all components used in the construction of an electrical appliance (for cables only see section 8.6.). Instructions covering all types of packing. Components with mounted on moving insertion parts

Appliance with moving components (relay switches, remote control switches, etc.) boards etc. must be made secure with the of pieces of card. The cards must bear the instruction to remove before the appliance is put into service.

Machined parts

Parts that are liable to be affected by humidity (i.e. rotating shafts, etc.) must, where possible, have their surfaces treated with easily removable protective materials not subject to leaching or crystallization as the result of temperature changes (see 2.2.), and smeared with grease. Where required protective board must be inserted between the commutator and the brushes.

Mechanical stress

If appliances are likely to suffer wear as a result of repeated or intensive mechanical stress (remote measurement or control apparatus, for example), they should be enclosed in wrappings. which give a sufficient amount of springiness, with a double bottom or double envelope with a backing and blocking of thicknesses of tared rubber, horshair or synthetic materials not susceptible to losing their own properties through the process of aging.

Lubrication circuits

Lubrication circuits in machinery will be protected by means of a suitable anti-rust lubricant. A label will be attached to oil lubricated bearings bearing the following notice in indelible lettering: “Attention: this bearing is without oil. Before the machine is started up lubricate with …….. “oil type.This warning will be inscribed in the language stipulated for the technical documentation relating to the order.

Dehydrating agent

Before the sealing off of inlets etc, including agents electrical parts (for example, actuators of engine valves), moisture absorptive agents must be inserted in the manner and in the quantities specified at 2.7. The location of and number of bags containing the agents must be indicated to facilitate their removal.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 33 (85)

Special precautions

Whenever special measures are taken for the transport of equipment, warning labels must be attached drawing attention to these measures. Whenever additional precautions have been, taken for the transport of equipment, such as locking the rotor, closing the breather pipes, application of protective layers to bearings, fitting of supports to shafts etc. warning labels will be attached to the machine in order to prevent mistakes being made during assembly. All labels will be written in the language stipulated for the technical documentation.

Transformers

The purchaser and/or the supplier may, decide, according to the dimensions of the equipment, the form of transport, the installation site etc., to dismantle for shipment the oil conservator, radiators and insulators in the case of transformers. If any components are to be dismantled this must be indicated in the offer, as well as any remuneration due for the services of assembly personnel. Transformers, unless expressly required to the contrary, when shipped without radiators and oil conservator must nevertheless be filled with oil and pressurized with an inert gas (such as nitrogen). Drums and cans of treated oil for topping up (for filling radiators and oil conservator) must be packed according to the method prescribed for paints, varnisches, solvents, bitumens, etc. (as section 8.19). Medium and low voltage transformers of an output up to 3150 kVA will normally be shipped complete and filled with oil, which must reach all the internal parts of the equipment. Instruments will normally be dismantled, packed and dispached separately

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 34 (85)

8.4.1.

Reduced form of Packing This type of packing can be prescribed for a few special cases , as follows: -

motors to be dispatched under a jobbing contract to the manufacturer of the machinery on order. The distance to be travelled must in each case be limited, and rail and/or sea transport may not be used.

-

equipment of extra large dimensions for installation in the open, transformers of over 2000 kVA, generators etc. capable of with standing handling and weather conditions.

Protection

Provisions must always the taken for the vulnerable parts of the equipment to be protected by means of wooden sheathing , firmly attached to the body of the machinery or by an overlay of shockproof material kept in pIace by adhesive tape, or by metal stays not attached to external hooks. If this is impracticable, wooden cross-pieces should be used. Sheating and other forms of protection must be positioned to lay on the more robust parts of the apparatus. Moving parts must be held firmly in place so that they cannot move. AlI items used for protection should be clearly identified in indelible paint with the inscription "FOR TRANSPORT PURPOSES ONLY” in the language of the country of origin and in the language specified in the order. Any apertures for cabling must be covered by means of discs firmly attached. Pressure plugs may not be used unless secured with adhesive tape. The seal must be secured by adhesive tape resistant to saline atmospheres and very high temperatures.

Timbering or boarding

The base must be bolted onto wooden timbers (15 x 6 cm min.) or boards (10 x 10 cm min.) in accordance with the weight of the equipment to enable it to be handled by fork-lift trucks and to keep it off the ground.

Transformers

Protective coverings for tube nests and radiators must not touch the items themselves and must not interfere with any instruments. Radiators If dispatched after being dismantled, they must be without oil and enclosed in crates. Insulators – external insulators If dispatched separately from the machine, they must be packed in crates. All apertures for the insulators are to be closed off with flange covers, stays and gaskets.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 35 (85)

Oil conservator If too large for any boxing used to protect the insulators, and it is dispatched separately, it must be drained of oil and packed in crates. If the oil conservator is dispatched assembled, measures must be taken to see that the oil does not overflow and pollute any moisture absorbing agents. Instruments These must be dismantled and packed in cardboard boxes, natural long-fibre kraft board, as specified in sections 2 and at 8.5. 8.4.2.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Equipment can normally be packed in crates, after vulnerable parts have been protected in the manner described at 8.4. Small-size items of equipment should be packed in cases. For equipment of limited size and weight cardboard boxes, natural long-fibre kraft board, of double or triple thickness can be used, loaded on pallets. The boxes must be made secure and fastened to the pallets by means of metal bands or bands of synthetic material. Small transformers can be crated and dispatched complete. Large transformers will be packed in accordance with paragraph 4.1. All dismantled parts, such as radiators, external insulators, oil conservator, will be packed in crates and instruments packed in cases.

8.4.3.

Overseas Type Packing Special care must be taken for equipment dispatched overseas, irrespective of destination, to ensure that it does not suffer damage from long periods in a hot, humid, saline climate while in transit. If it is impracticable to afford protection for the equipment in the form of specialized packing, the equipment will be tropicalized in accordance with specification SPC.ET.MAT.1901. Cases

All equipment should be packed in cases in accordance with section 2 and paragraph 8.4.

Heat-welded bags

Heat-welded bags {protective bags) and moisture-absorptive agents will be used in the majority of cases, and especially in the case of intricate mechanisms, electrical mechanisms and other equipment requiring protection against humidity and cannot be protected by other means. To prevent the protective bag from being damaged, any sharp edges on the equipment must be padded. Heat-welded bags need not be used for equipment designed to operate out of doors and therefore either built to be waterproof or weather-resistant.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 36 (85)

Protective paper

Certain vulnerable parts of equipment cannot paper be treated with protective substances; in such cases self-adhesive waxed paper impregnated with passivating substances can be used.

Dismantled parts

The main instruments on boards, panels and control desks that are likely to suffer damage during carriage, handling or storage, should be dismantled and packed in cases. Care must be taken to see that the exact positions in which they are to be replaced are clearly identified. Panel coupling elements (bus bars. bolts, nuts and washers) for medium and low voltage distribution boards and motor control panels will be packed in separate cases with the code numbers referring to each category pf board or panel. If there are any boards or panles on which the internal wiring needs to be disconned for purposes of shipment, this must be clearly identified to facilitiate subsequent rewiring.

Accumulator batteries

Accumulator batteries, appliances and instruments made of brittle materials must be given a form of protection inside the cases which will ensure thy remain intact during carriage and handling. If a case contains several items they must be kept apart by means of spacers of foamed plastic or other suitable material.

Switchboards and control panels

Switchboards and control panels must be packed as follows: a) b)

no case should contain more than three couple dpanles or boards arcing contact parts, if postioned in che contact-breakers and isolators, must be firmly secured; if they are being dispatched separately, each must be packed individually inside the case to avoid breakage of the contact..

Switchboards, control panels and control desks should be packed in cases, together with all their accessories. Motors

Motors will normally be supplied without the couplings; they should be packed separately, with an indication of the motor to which they belong. Motors will be firmly bolted down to the bottom of the case, and suitably protected. Junction boxes must be placed with the connection and coupling output channel towards the bottom. The drive shaft of the motor must be greased and protected. It must be stated whether the grease placed on bearings is for the purpose of preservation or operating.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 37 (85)

8.4.4.

Illuminating apparatus

Fluorescent lamps should be packed separate from the frames. They must be protected against possible breakage during loading, unloading and transport. Frames will be packed in crates separate from the lamps. Mercury-vapour lamps and incandescent lamps must be provided with protection inside the case by means of spacers of polysponge or other suitable material.

Boxes

Shunt and connection boxes will be packed in cases, according to their dimensions and method of construction.

Transformers

Large transformers must be packed in crates. No accessories must be allowed to project outside the crate. It must be possible to fasten a sling through the transformer eyebolts even after packing. Any dismantled parts (radiators, external insulators, oil conservator) must be empty of oil and packed in cases. Measuring and control instruments must be dismantled and packed in cases. The transformer must be bolted down to the base and held securely inside the crate to prevent it from moving. Small transformers up to 2000 kVA, will be forwarded complete and packed in cases. Any topping-up oil will be dispatched separately in 200 litre drums (see section 8.19).

Special overseas type packing Special overseas type packing for electrical and telecommunications equipment is as ordinary overseas type. In special cases, as specified in the order, the equipment will t be forwarded in non-returnable type containers. The following conditions should be noted in regard to the use of containers: -

containers provided by the supplier. For large consignments the supplier can make an offer for complete containerization of the equipment. It should be remembered that the container (s) will not be returned.

-

containers provided by the purchaser. In this event the container will be sent to the supplier's works or warehouse, or the supplier will be instructed to send the equipment to an appointed place for containerization.

The forwarding arrangements will be established in each particular case in agreement with the purchaser. Packages must be stowed inside the container in such a manner that the available space is utilized to the maximum extent and that packages cannot more. A corridor must be left in the centre of the container to allow for customs inspection.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 38 (85)

The following, for example, are suitable for containerization: -

Switchboards and control panels Miscellaneous electrical equipment Circuit-breakers Relays and moving parts ,of differing equipment.

Where equipment is packed in a container it must be given shockproof and anti-rust protection. The instructions given at 8.4 are valid for this purpose. Individual items of equipment to be placed in a container, to be, packed as for domestic consignments (see section 2 and 3). The purchaser nevertheless reserves the right, with equipment that is particularly valuable and fragile, to specify packing of the overseas type in nautical plywood cases. 8.5.

Instruments

(Control and safety valves, instrument and control panels, data, loggers, calculators, positioners, tape balances. instrumentation in general, centralized systems for measuring levels and temperatures of a set of tanks, digital indicators, analyzers, sampling systems, automotive valves, revolution counters, sequences, electronic computer systems, positive displacement meters, turbine meters, etc.) Instructions covering all types of packing. Digital indicators, computers, data loggers, sequences, electronic computer systems in general, valves and, in particular, their accessory mountings, must be looked upon as especially delicate apparatus. It is advisable, in these cases, for the supplier using his experience to express his own opinion on the form of protection required. Identification

The outside of each box and inner cover containing the individual instruments must be inscribed with: the code number of the instrument, this also applies to accessories the number of the purchase order or contract number and the location code for assembly.

Radio-active elements

For instruments with radioactive elements, the packing and protective measures employed must comply with international standards, regulations and conventions and with the standards and legislative provisions of the consignee country arid the transit countries concerned.

SpeciaI measures for transport and warehousing

If the nature of the instruments is such that special measures for transport and ware-housing need to be taken, such as protection against sudden changes of temperature, humidity, etc., the supplier should notify the purchaser.

All items must be individually packed and protected against contact with humidity or dust.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 39 (85)

Moving parts

Moving parts inside instrument units will be fixed firmly to the structure.

Neutralisation of mechanical stress

When any of the equipment being dispatched i.e.valves, remote measurement or control apparatus etc. is liable to be damaged due repeated or intensive mechanical stress, they must be protected by wrappings of such a kind as to offer a sufficient amount of springiness, with thicknesses of tared rubber or horsehair or synthetic materials not susceptible to losing their own properties through the process of aging.

Protection of apertures and outlets

Pneumatic apertures and all outlets will be protected by appropriate plugs to prevent the penetration of dirt during transit and assembly, after moisture-absorptive agents have first been inserted. Where agents are inserted, they must be identified on labels, so that they can be removed at the installation stage on site. All instruments and accessories, switch-boards, control apparatus and control panels control and consoles liable to suffer damage during transit and handling or to undergo deterioration while in store, will be dispatched in individual packing. Appropriate labelling will be used in order to assist reassembly.

lnstrument and control panels

8.5.1.

Copper tubing

As CABLES, section 8.6.

Flexible and multiple tubing

As CABLES, section 8.6

Packing for Domestic Consignments The packaging provided by the supplier will normally be acceptable under this classification. Offers to supply equipment should describe the type of packing to be used. The purchaser may decide on modifications before agreeing a final price. Cardboard boxes

General instrumentation and control and safety valves up to 8”, of limited dimensions and weight, will be packed in boxes made of strong water-resistant board, long-fibre multiple layer natural kraft board. Valves of up to 8”, for example, will be affixed by means of metal bands to a base of corrugated paper. Where the diameter exceeds 8" the base will consist of a wooden frame. The whole will then be placed vertically in card-board box. The space between the top of the valve and the lid of the box will be filled with corrugated paper or foamed polystyrene to prevent the contents from moving. Precision instruments must be individually wrapped in anticorrosive waxed paper and placed in a container of foamed polystyrene, suitably shaped. The whole will then be placed in a water-resistant cardboard box, long- fibre natural kraft board. The package must then the marked and inscribed with all the codes

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 40 (85)

and instructions necessary to ensure correct handling and storage as prescribed at 5.1. and 5.2. Rolls of graph paper for use with recording instruments will also be packed in cardboard boxes after being wrapped in tarred paper. Inks for recording instruments will be supplied in plastic bottles hermetically sealed and packed in cardboard boxes. Small accessories, connectors for flexible tubing, cable terminals, etc., and miscellaneous items such as bolts, washers and nuts will be supplied sorted and identified in cardboard boxes, with descriptions of quantity and weight. Instruments without any electrical to be packed to protect them from jolts and the type of transport to be used. Crates

8.5.2.

Valves of a diameter exceeding 8" and instruments of a significant weight (control boards, positive displacement meters, glass levels, etc.) must be packed in wooden crates. The wooden structure and the equipment will be constructed as one to increase the robustness of the consignment and to preventing the contents from moving. During the assembly of the rate, shock-absorbent inserts will be built into the structure. Equipment will be protected from dust and abrasion by sheets of polyethylene. Care must be taken to ensure that air can circulate inside the container. The top of the crate will be closed with “extra grader” plywood. The sides of the crate will be closed on the inside by means of a liner of corrugated paper.

Overseas type of packing All parts that are particularly vulnerable are to be coated with suitable protective agents that will not wash off or crystallize through changes of temperature. Cases

To avoid corrosion, oxydization or deterioration of the insulation of the electrical parts of equipment, all instrumentation in general, including instrument or control panels and electronic computer systems, will be suitably packed in cases. Individual appliances must be packed in cases and enclosed in an impermeable heat- welded protective bag. Apparatus must be cushioned before being placed in the bags to prevent any damage to the protective bags. Before the bags are sealed, moisture-absorptive agents must be inserted (see 2.7), and a partial vacuum must be created inside the bag.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 41 (85)

Precision instruments Precision instruments must be wrapped in anti-corrosive waxed paper (see 2.2), padded, and enclosed in protective bags in which moisture-absorptive agents have been placed (see 2.7); they must then be a put inside a container of foamed polystyrene of a suitable shape. The whole will then be placed in a water-resistant carton longfibre natural kraft board. The cartons must all be stowed next to one another inside a wooden case. Cases must be marked and inscribed with all the codes and instructions necessary to ensure correct handling and storage as prescribed at 5.1 and 5.2. Containers other than wooden cases may be used, provided they are equally strong and weather-resistant and have been approved in advance by the purchaser. Cases in nautical plywood are more suitable for instrument panels, control desks, accessory control boxes and control apparatus. Special care must be taken to see that the equipment cannot shift about inside the case with the use of packing material to fill the empty space. Positive displacement meters and turbine meters In addition to that already stated, internal parts of the above must be filled with gas oil. Rolls of graph paper for use with recording instruments will be packed in cartons, wrapped in hermetically sealed protective bags, which will in turn be packed in cases. lnks for recording instruments must be supplied in hermetically sealed, plastic bottles packed in wooden cases. Valves and accessories for tubing are to be separately identified. Small accessories (connectors for flexible tubing, cable terminals. etc.) and mjscellaneous items such as bolts, washers, nuts. etc. will be supplied duly sorted and identified in wooden boxes. Crates

Adjusting valves will be closed at the flanges by means of sheet discs and rubber ga skets (drawing No. 14); openings will be closed by means of plastic plugs secured by adhesive tape. The valves will then be packed in crates.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 42 (85)

8.5.3.

Special Overseas Type Packing In special cases and where it is stipulated that equipment must be able to stand up to severe climatic conditions, rigorous handling in transit or prolonged periods at the construction site before installation, the purchaser may arrange for the equipment to be Stowed in containers. The forwarding arrangements will be established in each particular case, i.e. either: -

the cantainer may be provided by the supplier (for large consignments); the purchaser may provide the supplier with the container; the purchaser may instruct the supplier to send the equipment to an appointed place for containerization.

If a container is used, equipment must still be afforded protection against impacts and corrosion. Stowage

Nautical plywood cases

Packages must be stowed inside the container in such a manner that the available space is utilized to the maximum extent and that the packages cannot move. A corridor must be left in the centre of the container to allow for customs inspection. Equipment that is of particular value or especially vulnerable must be placed in either protective bags polystyrene containers or cardboard boxes, and subsequently packed in nautical plywood cases. All the measures prescribed at 8.5.2. for closing up to outlets, protection oI- moving parts, etc. must be adopted. Meters Internal parts of meters must be filled with gas ail. Ralls of graph paper for use with recording instruments will be packed in cartons wrapped in hermetically sealed protective bags, and each carton will then be placed inside an additional moistureresistant carton of natural kraft board. Inks for recording instruments will be supplied in plastic bottles, hermetically sealed and packed in moisture absorbent cartons. Small accessories, connectors for flexible tubing, cable terminals etc. and miscellaneous items such as bolts, washers and nuts will be supplied sorted and identified in boxes indicating quantities and weight.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 43 (85)

8.6.

Cabling

Power cabling Instrument and telecommunications cabling Copper and polyethylene multiple tubing Flexible tubing (hose) All material wound on drums, (ropes, steel and copper cables, etc.) Instructions covering all types of packing. Reels

General cabling, flexible tubing (hose), multiple tubing, copper cables and tubes will normally be supplied on drums of robust construction to afford effective protection during transport and handling. Sizes must be those specified in the Data Sheet, and the tolerances allowed under the relevant standards must be observed. Wooden reels must be all in one piece, in good condition and have been recently painted with a waterproof paint. Ends Each drum will be provided with suitable caps for closing the ends to prevent moisture from penetrating the insulation, particularly for cables with mineral or paper insulation and for hydroscopic insulation in general. Identification Each drum must be marked with the following information: length, number of leads, type of cable, section in mm² of leads and an arrow indicating the direc tion of winding. This information will be given an metal tags attached to the drum. Drums must also be inscribed with the minimum temperature far the laying and/or handling of the cable.

8.6.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Cases

Power and instrument cables, etc., rolled up into a skein, should be packed in domestic type cases.

Drums

Drums must be closed by staves nailed to the flanges. With drums over 1 m in diameter staves are not considered to afford sufficient peripheral protection, and must be reinforced by boards, 8 x 8 cm, placed along the sides below the staving at a distance of about 50 cm.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 44 (85)

Rolls

8.6.2.

8.7.

Flexible copper and polyethylene tubing will be supplied in rolls with a wrapping of paper of jute.

Overseas Type Packing Cases

Power and instrument cables and copper tubing hot rolled into drums etc. should be packed in domestic type cases.

Drums

Drums must be closed by staves nailed to the flanges with strengthening boards, 8 x 8 cm, placed laterally below the staves at a distance of 50 cm. With drums over 1.50 m in diameter, these reinforcing boards must be replaced by stays bolted to the flanges. A sheet of tarred paper and a polystyrene sheet must be placed beneath the staves. Drums must have at least two complete turns of strapping.

Pipes and Tubes

of carbon steel or low alloy steel, galvanized with a liner of cement or bitumen with external cladding or bituminized painted with preservative in stainless steel, work-hardened copper or aluminium of cast iron in PVC and glass fibre duct-type for furnaces for exchangers for instrumentation, etc. 8.7.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Steel pipes

Pipes up to 6” diameter in carbon steel pipes or low-alloy steel, galvanized but not bituminized or painted with preservatives, will be assembled in bundles bound with twisted steel ropes (4 strands) of a minimum diameter of 5 mm, positioned 1 metre apart. Bundles must not weigh more than 1,000 kg. Bundles must so far as possible consist of pipes of the same diameter, thickness and length. Threaded ends of the pipes will be suitably protected by means of a plastic cap secured with tape. Plan end will be protected by sleeves, the ends of the bundle must be protected by means of plasticized jute. Pipes over 6" in diameter must be dispatched loose.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 45 (85)

Pipes with cement liner

These pipes with will be dispatched cement loose. Cemented tubes must be handled with care. Fork trucks may not be used for any loading or unloading operations. Pipes must not be allowed to drop or roll during the loading or unloading of the vehicle in order to avoid damage. Pipes must always be supported to avoid excessive bending during transit e.g.a tubular section of 8” diameter must be supported every 1.8 m. Hooks must not be inserted in the ends of tubes. Bands of hemp should be used in preference to steel cables. During transportation pipe supports should be covered with an elastic material, i.e. rubber, capable of absorbing shocks caused by bad road surfaces. Pipes must not be stacked at a height exceeding 1.20 m, both during transport and when stored.

Cladded or bitumized pipes

Bitumized pipes or those with cladding, excepting those that are painted, of diameters up to 6" must be kept apart by spiralshaped coils of vegetable fibre or synthetic material cord tied into a bundle. Padding of vegetable fibre or synthetic material of sufficient thickness and width to prevent damage will be placed between the strapping and the pipe. Rubber pads or wooden blocks may not be inserted between coated pipes. Pipes of over 6" diameter will be dispatched loose. Care must be taken when pipes is stacked or transported to: prepare a storage area free of stones or sharp-edged objects which could damage the cladding and also free of plants that might cause indentations in the bituminous coatings; provide spacers of wood for horizontal separation, planks not boards, to prevent the ends of the pipes from cutting through the cladding, for vertical separation of the pipes. vegetable fibre or artificial board should be used, rolled into a ring and secured with adhesive tape; ensure that pipes are lifted and slung by of canvas slings not by cables or chains; ensure that coated pipes are never rolled or slid, but are always lifted when being moved. Pipes must not be stacked or loaded until the cladding is cool enough for indentations to avoided. With pipes that are dispatched loose. a padding of vegetable fibre or syinthetic material must be placed underneath the strapping with which the pipes are held fast to the vehicle, of sufficient thickness and width as to protect the cladding from damage.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 46 (85)

Painted pipes or pipes treated with anti-rust

All handling of these pipes before installation, and during installation, must be effected with care, using of hemp ropes, canvas bands, rockers or other appropriate means. Painted pipes less than 6” in diameter should be dispatched in bundles fastened with stainless steel straps, each bundle to contain 3 or 4 tubes. Rockers (drawing No. 17) must be used for handling. Pipes aver 6” in diameter must be fitted with collars or strips of plastic, rubber, PVC or some other material for protection against mechanical damage. The strips need not have metal seals, but must be fastened by means of adhesive tape or some similar method (drawing No. 17). Pipes treated with anti-rust must be stored, either when in transit or at the construction site, in an area that has been well drained and is free of stones and sharp edged objects.

Stainless steel copper and alumin pipes

Pipes in stainless steel, copper and aluminium must be packed in crates. In order to save as much space as possible, the supplier/purchaser should take advantage of any possibilities of inserting one pipe inside another.

Cast iron pipes

Cast iron pipes must be assembled in rectangular packages as shown in drawing No. 18. Individual packages must not exceed 1,000 kg.

Duct-type pipes

Duct-type pipes must be fastened together in bundles.

Pipes in meter PVC and glass fibre

Pipes (hose) in PVC and glass fibre for dia up to 6" will be dispatched in bundles, over 6" in diameter they must be forwarded fibre loose.

Pipes furnaces

Straight and “U” shaped pipes (smooth, finned or hooked) in carbon steel or low-alloy steel will be packed in bundles. Strappings must not be more than 1.50 m apart. To facilitate handling it is advisable for there to be no more than two “U” shaped pipes package. Fork section should not exceed 9 m in length, to avoid damage in transit. With straight pipes (finned or hooked) the use of “tapparelle” (1) or lamination is acceptable.

Tubing for instruments

Tubes for instruments must be packed in crates, secured with metal bands. They must also be duly identified with the use of metal tags bearing indelible inscriptions.

(1) Tapparelle = rolling shutter

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 47 (85)

Tubes for exchangers

8.7.2.

Tubes for exchangers must be secured in bundles and packed in crates. The bundles must be firmly secured inside the crates.

Overseas Type Packing Steel pipes

Pipes of carbon steel, of low-alloy steel, galvanized, in diameter up to ½” and under 2 mm in thickness will be packed in crates, the gross weight of each crate not to exceed 1,000 kg. Crates must contain, so far as possible pipes of the same diameter, length, composition and thickness. Pipes are to be wrapped in polyethylene sheet and packed tightly inside the crate. They must have a maximum length of 8 m. Pipes over ½" and up to 6" in diameter are to be made up into bundles that can easily be handled and stacked, with fastenings of twisted steel rope (4 strands) of a minimum thickness of 5 mm, positioned 1 m apart. Bundles must not weigh over 1,000 kg. Internal pipe surfaces must be protected through closure of the two ends by one of the following methods: -

plastic caps secured by adhesive tape wooden plugs secured with adhesive tape.

The bundles should contain pipes of the same diameter, thickness, composition and length. One of the threaded ends of the pipes will be suitably protected by means of plastic secured with plenty of tape, or protection can be afforded by means of heat-shrunk polyethylene. The other end will be protected by a sleeve. The ends of the bundles containing threaded pipes must be protected with plasticized canvas. Pipes over 6" in diameter will be dispatched loose. If necessary, these pipes can be strengthened to prevent ovalization or deformation. The ends will be protected by means of U-shaped pieces of plastic, applied under pressure at the ends, and taped. Pipes with cement liner

As 8.7.1.

Cladded or bituminised pipes

As 8.7.1.

Pipes painted with preservative or anti-rust

As 8.7.1.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 48 (85)

Pipes in stainless steel, copper and aluminium

Pipes in stainless steel, copper and aluminium must be packed in cases. In order to save as much space as possible, the supplier/purchaser should take advantage of any possibilities of inserting one pipe inside another.

Cast iron pipes

Cast pipes must be assembled in rectangular packages as shown in drawing No. 18. Individual packages must not exceed 1,000 kg.

Duct-type

Duct-type pipes must be fastened together, in bundles, with the ends plugged.

Pipes in PVC and glass fibre

Pipes in PVC and glass fibre must be packed in wooden cases protected against deformation during transport or ambient temperatures while stacked in the open.

Pipes for furnaces

Straight and “U” shaped pipes smooth, finned furnaces or hooked, in carbon steel or low-alloy steel will be packed as indicated in drawing No. 19. Fastenings must not be more than 1.5 m apart. The ends of pipes and socket joint headers must be suitably plugged with wooden plugs and secured with tape. To facilitate handling it is advisable for there to be no more than two "U" shaped pipes per package. "U" shaped pipes should not exceed 9 m in length to avoid damage in transit. With straight pipes (finned or hooked) the use of "Tapparelle" (1) or lamination is acceptable. Markings should be in paint free of lead, aluminium or oil.

(1)

Tubing for instruments

Tubing for instruments will be packed according to the quality, length, dimensions and quantity of the tubing in strengthened wooden cases secured by metal bands. Tubing with threaded ends must be provided with metal or plastic plugs to protect the thread, and preserve them from damage from the penetration of foreign bodies. In all cases tubing must be suitably identified by means of metal labels with indelible inscriptions.

Tubing for exchangers

Tubing for exchangers must be closed at the ends with wooden or plastic plugs, secured , in bundles and packed in cases. The equipment must be wrapped in polyethylene sheet and held firmly in position inside the case.

Tapparelle = rolling shutter

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 49 (85)

8.8.

Fittings

Flanges General fittings Accessories for tubing Elbows and ends for furnace coils Launch and recovery traps Loading arms Instructions covering all types of packing. Valves, flanged and general fittings must be marked in accordance with the order specifications. 8.8.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Steel flanges

Flanges will be protected against oxydation with the application of a suitable preservative that can easily be removed before installation. Flanges of small dimensians (up to 6”) will be threaded necklace fashion and placed in strong polyethylene cr jute bags. Flanges over 6" in size must be assembled in piles and held together by means of at least 3 tie-bolts. To prevent the faces of the flanges from becoming damaged. discs of soft material masonite, etc. must be interposed between them and the top flange must be protected by discs of nautical plywood. The nuts for the tie-bolts will be welded, to prevent pilfering.

Stainless steel flanges

Flanges of this type will be protected and packed in accordance with the instructions for carbon steel flanges, a coating or preservative or greasing, piles secured by tie bolts, necklaces, etc. and then packed in cases, for those up to 6”, or in crates for those over 6" in diameter.

Flanges in PVC and glass fibre

Flanges of up to 12" will be threaded necklace fashion, placed first in polyethylene or jute bags and then in palletized boxes fibre of dual or triple layer long-fibre natural kraft board. A disc of soft material polystyrene, must be placed between each flange. Flanges over 12” in diameter will be placed without being assembled in triple-wall long fibre natural kraft board cartons. A disc of soft material must be placed between each flange. Cartons must be palletized.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 50 (85)

Carbon steel fittings

Threaded fittings must be protected against oxydization with the application of a suitable preservative that can be easily removed before installation. Fittings up to 6" will be threaded necklace fashion and placed in strong polyethylene or plasticized gunny sacks. Fittings larger than 6" must be distpatched packed in crates. Crates must be well banded, and must not exceed 1,000 kg in weight.

Stainless steel, copper and aluminium fittings

As for steel fittings, except that, they must be packed in cases for items up to 6” in diameter, or crates, over 6” in diameter.

Fittings in PVC and glass fibre

Fittings of over 6” will be threaded necklace fashion, inserted in polyethylene bags according to size and subsequently placed in double and triple walled palletized cartons of long fibre natural kraft board. Fittings over 6” in diameter will be placed without being assembled in palletized triple walled cartons of long-fibre natural kraft board.

Fittings with cement liner or cladding

Fittings (including pipes) having a cement lining or coating must be handled with great care. They must not be rolled of vehicles or allowed to fall or drop during loading or unloading operations and every precaution must be taken to avoid impact damage. Fittings of up to 20” will be firmly packed in crates; Fittings of over 20” will be dispatched loose.

Steel valves

Each valve must be marked as per the technical specifications, be complete with alI accessories and be ready for immediate installation. All valves must. have their inlets closed off by means of plastic plugs sealed with silicon rubber and adhesive taped, while flanges must be closed off with wooden or nautical plywood discs fixed with adhesive tape. Machined parts will be protected against oxydation with the application of suitable preservatives, that can be easily removed before installation. Valves of up to 2” must be threaded necklace fashion and placed in strong polyethylene or plasticized gunny bags. Valves of over 2” and up to 12" in diameter must be packed in lightened type crates. max. weight 1,000 kg. Valves must be packed vertically to prevent damage to the handwheels. Wherever possible, handweels may be dismantled and attached with galvanized steel wire to the body of the valve. Valves larger than 12" in diameter will be dispatched individually with handwheels and other parts liable to be damaged boxed in with wood.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 51 (85)

Stainless steel valves

Stainless steel valves will be protected as prescribed for carbon steel valves, and therefore packed in crates. Crates must not exceed 1,000 kg in weight.

PVC valves

These valves will be wrapped in crepe paper, placed in plasticized gunny bags and then packed in crates. Crates must not exceed 1,000 kg in weight.

Release traps

All machined parts must be given a coating of antirust that is easily removable. Before dispatch, the body of the trap, the quick closing mechanism, all flanges, ends and moving parts must be suitably protected against deterioration during transit, in the following manner: secondary piping is to be dismantled and tied in bundles, with the insertion of rubber or PVC material between strapping and pipes; flanges will be plugged with plastic or nautical plywood discs fixed with adhesive tape; vulnerable parts, valves, gauges, handwheels, etc. will be dismantled and packed in cases. The body of the trap must be provided with saddles suitably secured by means of stays kept taut by stayrods and of sufficient thickness to prevent the quick-closing mechanism and valves from touching the ground.

Loading arms

Loading arms will be dispatched dismantled, at least so far as the essential parts are concerned, articulated joints, oleodynamic, controls, arm pieces , etc. Each item must be clearly marked with the assembly code number. Threaded connections must be fitted with wooden or steel plugs that have been well greased. Flanges, ends of fittings, etc., must be fitted with plugs or caps fixed in position by strips of metal or canvas. Loose parts, articulated joints, oleodynamic controls, etc., will be placed in cartons and then packed in crates. Arm and column pieces will be dealt with in the manner prescribed for tubing; pieces of up to 6” diameter will be assembled in bundles and packed in crates, with the insertion of rubber of PVC material between strapping and tubing. End flanges will be protected by plugs and plasticized gunny, secured by metal strips. Arms of a diameter greater than 6” will be dispatched loose, care being taken to ensure that the flanges are protected by discs of phenolic plywood and plasticized gunny bags.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 52 (85)

8.8.2.

Overseas Type Packing Steel flanges

All flanges must be protected against oxydation by means of special semi-permanent grease Flanges of small dimensions (up to 8”) will be threaded necklace fashion, placed in strong polyethylene or gunny bags and packed in cases. Discs of soft, non-hygroscopic material will be inserted between individual flanges. Cases must be well strapped and not exceed 1,000 kg in weight. Special care must be taken to arrange the flanges inside the cases so as to avoid damage to the coupling surfaces, scoring, recessing, slots for ring joints. etc. Flanges of over 6” and up to 20” must be assembled in piles held together by at least 3 tie-bolts, and packed in well strapped crates. Discs of soft material, e.g. masonite, must be interposed between the flanges, and the top of the pile protected by discs of nautical plywood. Flanges over 20” in diameter will be firmly arranged in crates with discs of soft material, e.g. masonite, in between. Crates must be well strapped and not weightmore than 1,000 kgs.


All flanges made of stainless steel must be protected against corrosion and pre-packed in the manner described for carbon steel flanges and packed in cases. The flanges will be wrapped in polyethylene sheet inside the cases.

PVC glass fibre flanges

Packing as under domestic packing, except that flanges up to 4” will be packed in cases and those of larger diarneters in crates.

Fittings in carbon steel

All fittings made of carbon steel, drawn, carbon forged and, in particular, threaded, must be protected against oxydization by means of special long lasting grease. Fitting up to 6” will be threaded necklace fashion, placed in strong polyethylene or jute bags and packed in cases. Each bag will contain items of the same type, size and material, and will be accompanied by an identification label firmly attached on the outside. Cases must be well strapped and not weigh more than 1,000 kg. Fittings over 6” in diameter will be arranged, unassembled, in crates, with wooden planking between the different layers. Crates must be well strapped and not weigh , more than 1,000 kg. Items must be well secured inside the cases and/or crates.

Fittings in stainless steel copper and aluminium alloy

All fittings in stainless steel, copper and aluminium must be protected against corrosion and prepacked as prescribed for fittings in carbon steel and packed in cases. Fittings must be carefully secured inside the cases.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 53 (85)


As for domestic type packing, except that fittings of up to 6” will be packed in cases and those over 6” in crates.


As for domestic type packing. Fittings larger than 20” will be dispatched packed in crates.

Accessories for tubing

All accessories for tubing, spectable blinds, quickrelease connections, sealing, flow spyholes, steam traps, sprayers, spring supports, expansion bends, hoses, etc., will be properly protected against corrosion with the application of a preservative, placed in bags of polypropylene raffia and packed in cases. Each piece must be labelled in accordance with its technical specifications.

Steel valves

All valves must be protected against oxydization by means of special long-lasting grease and plastic plugs sealed with silicone rubber or taped, while flanges will be closed with laminated discs and rubber gaskets (as drawing No. 14). Each valve must be dispatched labelled as per the technical specification complete with all accessories and ready far installation. Each valve will bear its own identification label in accordance with the technical specifications. Gate valves will be dispatched in the closed position, but plug cocks must be open. Before items are packed, the manufacturer/packer must make sure that valves have been greased and that all foreign bodies or traces have been removed. Valves of up to 4”, as well as being threaded necklace fashion and placed in polyethylene bags, will be packed in cases. Valves of over 4” will be packed in crates after handwheels and moving parts have been protected by means of polyethylene hoods and cushioning material. Valves will be packed vertically to prevent damage to handwheels. Whenever expedient, handwheels can be dismantled and attached with galvanized steel wire to the body of the valve. Valves of over 12” will be packed as provided for in the instructions for domestic packing.

Stainless steel valves

Stainless steel valves will be protected steel in the manner prescribed for carbon steel valves in cases. Cases must not weigh more than 1,000 kgs.

PVC valves

Packing as for domestic consignments. except valves that the valves will be packed in cases. Cases must not weigh more than 500 kg.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 54 (85)

Release traps

Loading arms

As for domestic packing, with the following traps differences: -

machined parts must be smeared with long-lasting grease and wrapped in passivating paper (see 2.2);

-

vulnerable parts will be wrapped in shape forming crepe paper placed in strong double walled cartons of long-fibre natural kraft board, and packed in overseas type cases;

-

flanges must be closed off with laminated discs and rubber washers (see drawing No. 14);

Instructions differences: -

-

8.8.3.

as

for

domestic

packing,

with

the

following

flanges and ends of fittings, etc., must be well greased and closed off with laminated discs and rubber gaskets (see drawing No. 14) and well protected by polypropylene raffia bags secured with metal fastenings; loose parts will be well greased, wrapped in shape forming paper and packed in cases.

Special overseas Type Packing Steel flanges

Instructions as for overseas type packing, except that all flanges must be packed in cases.


As 8.8.2.

Flanges in PVC and glass fibre

As 8.8.2., except that flanges will be packed in cases.

Fittings in carbon steel

As 8.8.2., except that flanges will be packed in cases.

Fittings in stainless steel, copper and aluminium alloy

As 8.8.2.


As 8.8.2., except that all fittings will be packed in cases.


As 8.8.2., except that, whatever the diameter, cemented fittings must always be packed in cases.

Steel valves

As 8.8.2

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 55 (85)

8.9.

Valves in stainless steel

Valves of up to 20” will be greased, individually wrapped in passivating paper and then packed in overseas type cases not weighing over 1,000 kg. Valves of 10” and above will be packed separately. Particular care must be exercised in protecting handwheels and vulnerable parts. Handwheels can be dismantled and secured with steel wire to the body of the valve. Valves of over 20” will be protected as 8.8.2.

Valves in stainless steel

Valves in stainless steel will be greased, individually wrapped in passivating paper and then packed in overseas type cases not weighing over 1,000 kgs.

PVC valves

As 8.8.2.

Release traps

As 8.8.2. with the difference that the body of the traps must also be packed in a case and the flanges covered with sheet metal discs and rubber washers as per drawing No. 14.

Loading arm

As 8.8.2.

Gaskets and Joi ntin g

Gaskets for tubing, machinery and joints, gaskets of asbestos, rubber, PVC, teflon, spiral wound gaskets plastic coated metal gaskets and ring-joints. Gaskets will be grouped by type, material and size, and each group of items will carry an identification label. 8.9.1.

Packing for domestic consignments Small-sized gaskets, grouped by type, will be placed in ventilated bags of paper, waxed cloth or PVC, duly identified and then packed in palletized boxes. Large-sized gaskets will be packed in crates or attached to, wooden frames so that they are prevented from losing their shape during transit. Ring-joints must be carefully oiled and separately wrapped in oiled paper and corrugated paper; they will then the placed in small ventilated polyethylene bags, duly identified, and then packed in cases.

8.9.2.

Overseas type packing Metal gaskets and ring-joints will be treated with long-lasting grease and individually wrapped in waxed, passivating crepe paper (2.2.). Small-diameter gaskets, grouped by type, will be placed in ventilated polyethylene bags, duly identified, then in water-proofed boxes and finally packed in cases. Large-diameter gaskets will be attached to wooden frames and packed in cases. The cases must contain instructions in the prescribed language regarding unpacking of the contents.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 56 (85)

8.10.

Complete Plant Packages

Furnaces and boilers Generating sets Water treatment plant Desalination plant Air-heating plant Evaporation tower Air and electrostatic filters etc. etc. 8.10.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments General recommendations (with special ref. to furnace and boilers)

Large sized plant furnaces and boilers will normally be dispatched prefabricated and subdivided into their main component parts. Within certain dimensional limits the distance to be travelled, the means of conveyance and the destination, furnaces and boilers can be dispatched already assembled. If plant is to be dismantled for transport purposes, the details must be studied in the initial project stage and discussed between the purchaser and supplier at the time of the offer. The same procedure must be adopted in the case of speciaI equipment (such as cold boxed with plant for the prduction of inert gases) where special clamping methods are required inside the plant itself. Before dispatch, all plant must be throughly cleaned; any slag excess welding, burrs, etc. must be removed. All equipment must also be treated and coated with preservatives as stipulated in the technical specifications. Internal surfaces, which must be in contact with the insulation layer of the furnace and/or chimney, will be treated with protective drying oil. All machined surfaces must be carefully protected from oxydization by means of grease or or other substances (protective anti-rust resins) that can be readily removed. If a furnace or boiler is transported already assembled there is no need for packing as such. It will be sufficient far any projecting or especially vulnerable parts which cannot be dismantled to be protected by means of boxing and binding. All threaded connections must be fitted with plugs, well greased and bound with tape. Flanges must also be covered with discs of wood or ”faesite" secured firmly in place to prevent the penetration of foreign bodies (see drawing No. 13).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 57 (85)

The base must be bolted to strong planking or boarding so that the equipment is off the ground. Individual items must be packed in the following manner: -

Instruments and all apparatus that can be easily damaged must be packed in cases, in accordance with section 2;

-

supports and guides for tuyere plates and V supports for supporting the refractory will be tied into bundles and placed in gunny bags;

-

inspection ports, tuyere plates, soot blowers and the detached parts of pipe coils will be packed in crates;

-

burners and accessories will be packed in crates;

-

for cement and/or binders in general, refractory bricks, granulates, vermiculite, etc., see sections 8.15 and 8.17;

-

for tubes and bifurcations, whether smooth, finned or hooked, see instruction under “PIPES AND TUBES” (8.7);

-

pipe coils will be secured by means of wooden curves or saddles to prevent losing their shape or becoming detached from the structural element tow hich they belong;

-

tubing must not be allowed to sag, and the various spaced supports (curves or saddles) must therefore be properly positioned therefore be properly positioned;

-

furnace shells, chimneys and all cylindrically shaped parts of less than 3 m in diameter must be provided with planking and wooden wedges secured by sheet iron ties and stays. Shells and chimneys being dispatched in sections for assembly at the installation site must be provided with planking or curves to prevent them from becoming deformed. They must also be provided with eyebolts for hoisting. For prefabricated sections consisting solely of metal structures, suitable strengtheners in wood or iron must be provided to prevent permanent warping and/or deformation during the various (stages of handling and transport. Stays, beams. crosspieces and lifting hooks must be applied at the most suitable positions for prevention of damage. Ends of cylindrically shaped parts not sufficiently robust to retain their shape must be reinforced with cross-pieces and strengthened by temporary connecting rails.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 58 (85)

For prefabricated metal structures provided with refractory insulation cladding, the cladding in addition to strengtheners, must be afforded protection. This is intended to prevent elastic deformation of the plate Supports causing fissures or splits in the cladding material. In particular. protection must be given to the places where, supports, hooks and slings are to be attached for handling purposes. If there is a considerable length of cladding surface this must be protected by wooden cross-pieces or planking. All component parts of the plant will be clearly marked with codes referring to the assembly drawings. Generator sets

Diesel-driven generator sets of up to 20 sets kVA will be packed in crates. For sets with an output exceeding 20 kVA a lower scale of packing can be employed, with the use of wooden planking bolted to the base and protection or projecting and vulnerable parts by boxing and polypropylene raffia fastenings. The following measures must be adopted in every case: All moving parts, e.g. lever mechanisms, must be firmly fastened to the machine. Machine parts liable to suffer deterioration must be protected with easily removable anti-rust preservative and smeared with grease, guaranteed to remain effective for at least 6 months. Inflammable materials or those containing solvents must not be used.

Miscellaneous plant

Miscellaneous plant are those for water treatment, desalination, air and electrostatic filters, and so on. Such plant basically consist of metal structures, pumps, electric motors, control boards and metal framework which are normally dispatched separately. The instructions given in the sections dealing with these particular parts will accordingly apply. Individual pieces must be clearly marked in order to facilitate reassembly at the installation site. All internal parts susceptible to rusting should they remain for long periods in the open must be protected with an anti-rust preparation or by the application of measures agreed with the purchaser. The same applies to external parts. Direct coupled motors for controls will be dispatched mounted on the base of the operating machine. Motors with belt drives will be forwarded separately.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 59 (85)

8.10.2.

Overseas Type Packing General recommendations (with special ref. to furnaces and boilers)

As for domestic type packing, with the foIlowing differences: -

flanges must be closed using steel discs and rubber gaskets bolted to the flange to prevent the penetration of foreign bodies (see drawing No. 14);

-

with the exception of mountings all internal and external parts susceptible to rusting, should they remain for long periods in the open, must be protected with an easily removable anti-rust preparation or with measures agreed with the purchaser.

-

individual items, including spare parts, must be coated with a preservative and greased as above then either wrapped in passivating paper (see 2.2.) or covered with a layer removable plastic and marked with the code of the item of equipment to which they belong;

-

instruments and apparatus that may be easily damaged must be packed in cases, observing the precautions laid down in section 2;

-

supports and guides for tuyere plates and tubing and V supports for supporting the refractory will be placed in polypropylene raffia bags then packed in cases;

-

tuyere plates, inspection ports, mechanical parts for furnace doors, soot blowers and the detached parts of pipe coils will be packed in cases;

-

burners and accessories will be packed in cases;

-

pipes coil assemblies, up to an outside diameter of 2 m, will be protected an easily removable anti-corrosive preservative and packed in crates. Pipe coils must be firmly secured by crosspieces fixed inside the crate.

-

for pipe coils forwarded using C-shaped supports matching the curvature of the pipe coils. Sections should be stacked one on top of the other, up to a maximum of three, with wooden spacers in between, and packed in a crate;

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 60 (85)

Generator sets

-

for individual forks in pipe coils, whether smooth. finned or hooked, and for carbon steel tubes, whether smooth, finned or hooked, see 8.7 "PIPES AND TUBES”. Items must be protected externally with protective drying oil that can easily be removed. Ends of tubes, forks, tube nests and pipe coils must be hermetically sealed with a plug, secured with tape.

-

shells of furnaces and boilers, chimneys and all cylindrically shaped parts of less than 3 m in diameter must be fixed to wooden saddles by means of a sheet iron tie and strengthening stays. Rubber or plastic spacers must be inserted between the tie and the shell. Shells and chimneys of a diameter in excess of 3 m, dispatched in sections, must be provided with saddles. They must also be fitted with eyebolts for hoisting.

Diesel-driven generator sets will be protected as for domestic type packing, but with the following additional precautions: -

all generator sets will be packed in crates. The equipment will be protected inside the crate with a protective cover of polyethylene 0.20 mm thick. The machinery will be made waterproof by closing all apertures. Flanges must always be protected by discs, minimum thickness 3 mm, and rubber gaskets as in drawing No. 14.

-

machined parts susceptible to wear and tear must be protected with special grease and wrapped in antirust waxed paper. Inflammable materials and those containing solvents must not be used.

All instrumentation, oilers, spy-holes, distribution panels, etc. must be dismantled and packed separately in cases. Before being placed in the case the equipment must be greased and wrapped in anti-rust waxed paper, or covered with a layer of easily removable plastic and inserted in a protective bag. Moisture-absorptive agents must be placed in the protective bag (see 2.7.).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 61 (85)

8.10.3.

Special Overseas Type Packing General recommendations (with special ref. to furnaces and boilers)

As overseas type packing

Generator sets

As for overseas packing with the exception of: -

Miscellaneous plant

8.11.

the machines will be packed in wooden cases. the machines must be enclosed in heat-sealed protective bag in which moisture-absorptive agents have been placed (see 2.7.)

Water treatment plant, desalination plant, plant air-heating plant, air and electrostatic filters, etc. as for overseas type packing.

Struct ural Work

Structural work in generaI Structural work in metal Sections and grating work Prefabricated tubing 8.11.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignmnts Structural

Structural work in general, structures, sections and grating work will be dispatched in bundles or groupings held together by welded joints or 5 mm annealed, galvanized fastenings placed at 1 m intervals. Welded joints are not to be used on galvanized material, material treated with preservative or any other surface treatment. Each bundle must, so far as possible, contain items of the same type and size. The bundles should not exceed the weight/volume ratio of 1 tonne/m³, the capacity of the available hoisting gear must be taken, into account. Markings on the bundles or wrappings must tally. with the descriptions in the packing list, and enable the contents of each bundle or package to be readily identified without the need to remove wrapping. All items will bear an inscription in indelible ink showing the reference numbers of the assembly drawings. Bolts, nuts, washers, etc., suitably greased, will be sorted by type and dispatched in polyethylene raffia sacks. Small items. such as brackets. tacking plates, rjngs, hooks, etc., should be packed in cases as for domestic consignments.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 62 (85)

Step irons, unless otherwise specified in the order, will be dispatched as follows: -

the step elements will be tied into bundles;

-

the safety caging will be assembled at the installation site, and the calendered elements should be tied into bundles separately from the uprights, which should also be tied in bundles.

If it is stipulated in the order that cagings will be assembled at the manufactures they must be packed as shown in drawing No. 20. The consignment will be secured by a metal strap 30 x 4 mm and fastenings of 5 mm twisted rods, approximately 1 m apart. Frames for platform galleries must be placed one on top of the other with the plates arranged in the free spaces, the whole to be made firm by means of a metal strap. To prevent parapet sections from arriving at the site twisted or bent, they will be dispatched loose, packed as follows:

Prefabricated tubing

-

handrails, stanchions and footrails in commercial bars: in bundles;

-

uprights of parapets, precision cut and drilled: in bundles;

-

calendered handrails for circular gangways: strapped to the circular gangways to which they belong;

-

special handrail sections for inclined steps: in wooden cases.

Tubing not prefabricated at the manufactures tubing must be prepared for dispatch as follows: flanges must be covered with discs of wood, metal or plastic, bolted to the flange. The discs must be large enough to protect the whole of the flange surface. Chamfers must be protected by covers attached to the "spool”. Ends of threaded connections must be protected by spigot-andbell caps attached with adhesive tape. -

Suction and interstage pipes for compressors must have the openings plugged and protected as above.

If there are to be several consignments, each batch must comprise all the prefabricated items belonging to each isometric drawing.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 63 (85)

8.11.2.

Overseas Type Packing Structural work in general structures, sections and grating

Structural work involving structures over 5 mm of thickness will be tied in bundles Bundles, must not weigh more than 1500 kg. Care must be taken to see that prefabricated items are arranged so that they do not progject outside the bundle and can not fall out. Structural work, unless otherwise indicated, must be appropriately grouped, with individual pieces being pre-welded to ensure they are sufficiently robust. Welding operations must not impair in any way the soundness and usability of the items being dispatched. Welding must not be undertaken or structural items that thave been galvanized, treated with preservatives of any other surface preparation. Structural work of a thickness under 5 mm should be packed in wooden crates. All items will bear an inscription in indelible white paint giving the reference numbers of the assembly drawing. Bundles should be made up and marked, etc. as for domestic type packing. Bolts, nuts and washers, etc., suitably greased, will be sorted by type, placed in polyethylene raffia sacks and packed in cases. Small iterns, such as brackets, tacking plates, rings, hooks, etc. should be packed in cases. Step irons, gangways and galleries to be despatched as for domestic consignments.

Prefabricated tubing

As domestic type packing, except that: -

flanges must be protected against corrosion by application of special long-lasting preservatives and covered with a sheet metal disc and rubber gasket, as in drawing No. 14.

-

threaded ends must be greased, and protected by spigotand-bell caps, secured with tape.

Individual pieces should be clearly marked in order to facilitate assembly at the installation site. Prefabricated items, if their shape precludes them from being assembled in bundles, will be packed in crates. 8.12.

Link age and Nuts and Bolt

Stays, bolts and nuts, metal inserts. etc.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 64 (85)

8.12.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Stays, nuts and bolts and metal inserts, unless protected by other stable agents (cadmiumplated, galvanized. etc.) will be thoroughly greased, sorted into types and enclosed in polypropylene raffia sacks. Items must be identified by means of a label tied onto the outside of the sack, and another label placed inside. Small-sized nuts and bolts should be placed in cartons and packed in domestic type cases. Cases must not exceed 100 kg. Stays will be collected into bundles. The ends of the bundles will be covered with polypropylene raffia.

8.12.2.

Overseas Type Packing Stays, nuts and bolts and metal inserts, etc. will be treated with preservative as prescribed for domestic type packing, and packed in cases.

8.13.

Plate

Plate in general and shell-plate for reservoirs Stainless steel and cladded plate. Instructions covering alI types of packing Plate will normally be sent to installation sites without any form of surface treatment unless otherwise specified in the order, in which case the type of treatment required will also be specified. Parts treated with anti-rust, painted or cladded must be moved with care, using hemp ropes, canvas slings, rockers or other suitable methods to prevent damage or wear to the coating. Any parts of hoisting machinery which will be in contact with painted surfaces must be covered with a suitable material. Each plate and each structural component must be clearly marked with the specification number, the drawing number and the assembly code number. The storage area for items treated with anti-rust painted or cladded due care must be well drained and free of stones and sharpedged objects. 8.13.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Raw plate and shell-plate

Plates and shell-plates comprising a single package do not require any special packing. Planking or boards should be inserted as spacers between each plate to facilitate hoisting (drawing No. 21). In stacking shell-plates, the first plate must rest on saddles or wedges to avoid any deformation (drawing No. 22). Plates assembled in bundles must be held together with bands of stainless steel. If plates have no chamfers for welding, it is expedient to weld vertically pieces or straps onto the sides of the bundles to make them more compact (see drawing No. 21). Wooden beams should be interposed between each bundle to facilitate lifting.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 65 (85)

Wooden supports for shell-plates must be shaped in such a way that the bundles can be stacked on top of one another without being affected by the weight or curvature of the shell-plates (see drawing No. 22). Painted or cladded plate

Plates that have been painted or cladded and in a single package must be stacked interposed with wooden strips to facilitate mechanical handling without damaging them, and to ensure that the coating is ventilated. When such plates are stacked for storage or transport the painted sides of the first and last plate should be turned inwards (see drawing No. 23). With shell-plates suitable saddles or wedges should be placed under the first plate to prevent deformation of those stacked on top (see drawing No. 24). Flat painted plates, assembled in bundles and secured with stainless steel fastenings, will be treated as follows: -

painted surface must have 8-10 mm plastic rods interposed between them

-

the first and last plate must have the non-painted side facing outwards;

-

the bundle must be fastened with stainless steel bands (see drawing No. 23)

The wooden supports used with shell-plates assembled in bundles must be shaped in such a way that the bundles can be stacked on top of one another without being affected by the weight or the curvature of the shell plates (ill. No. 24). Shell-plates, whether calendered or not, must be packed in groups and provided with suitable frames to prevent damage to chamfers in transit. Stainless steel and Cladded plates

8.13.2.

Plates of this type must be packaged. made secure with stainless steel bands and packed in crates. A sheet of soft paper must be laid between the plates.

Overseas Type Packing Raw plate

As for domestic type packing.

Painted plate

As above

Stainless steel and cladded plate

Plate of this type must be packaged, secured with stainless steel bands and packed in cases. A sheet of passivating or waxed paper must be laid between the plates (see 2.2.).

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 66 (85)

8.14.

Electrodes

8.14.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Individual packages of electrodes must be wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene and packed in cardboard boxes. The cardboard boxes will in turn be banded and wrapped in heatshrunk polyethylene. No box must weigh more than 20 kg. If there are several boxes in consignment, the supplier must arrange the boxes on pallets, suitably banded.

8.14.2.

Overseas Type Packing Electrodes will be packed in cases. Cases will be restricted to a maximum weight of 100 kg. Cases should be made, if necessary, with metal reinforcements using plenty of metal straps. Individual packages of electrodes will be marked with the denomination of the electrode they contain and its characteristics (materials, voltage, etc.). and wrapped as a precaution in heatshrunk polyethylene. Packages will then be placed inside heat-sealed bags, with indication of the contents, into which moisture-absorptive agents have first been placed (see 2.7.).

8.14.3.

Special overseas Type Packing Electrodes must be packed as per the instructions at 8.14.2. with the following differences: -

apart from being placed in a safety bag, electrodes will be enclosed in hermetically sealed, waterproof metal boxes (max. weight 25 kg). These metal boxes will in turn be placed in overseas type cases. No case should weigh than 100 kg.

If a container is used for transport, the packing can be limited to the metal boxes (without the need for the wooden cases). In addition to the markings stipulated in the order, boxes must be clearly marked with the type and characteristics of the electrodes they contain. 8.15.

INSULATION

Rock-wool and glass-wool Insulating materials 8.15.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Rock-wool and glass-wool

Rock-wool and glass-wool will be packed in doubled polyethylene bags.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 67 (85)

Insulating materials

8.15.2.

8.15.3.

Containers of calcium silicate, etc. will materials be packed in cardboard boxes. The boxes will themselves be wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene. A part from the usual markings they must also clearly show the type and characteristics of the insulating material they contain. Insulating material dispatched in bulk, such as granulates, vermiculite, etc. will be packed in multi-layer paper bags with two coatings of bitumen, or in double polyethylene bags. The bags will be assembled on pallets, in a criss-cross pattern, and covered with heat-shrunk plastic. They must not be stacked to a height exceeding 1 metre. The pallets must be strapped, and reinforcing guards must be applied ta the corners. If slings are to be used this must be agreed when the order is placed.

Overseas Type Packing Rack-wool and glass-wool

Rack-wool and glass-wool will be placed in a doubled polyethylene bag which will in turn be inserted in a polypropylene raffia bag and finally in a wooden crate. Since the material concerned is light and voluminous, crates can be used with planks and battens of reduced dimensions.


Containers of calcium silicate must be packed in wooden crates. Materials will be stowed inside the crates in cardboard boxes, which must in turn be wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene. The boxes, apart from the usual markings, must also clearly show the type and characteristics of the insulating materials they contain. Alternatively the separate items contained in the boxes must bear plastic labels attached with weather resistant adhesive. Insulating material sent in bulk, such as granulates, vermiculite, etc., will be, packed in wooden crates. The material will be stowed inside the crates in multilayer paper pags and a double polyetylene bag. Metal containers with a lid for fastening are not acceptable.

Special overseas Type Packing Rock-wool and glasswoll

As far overseas type packing, except that and materials must be packed in cases.


As above

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 68 (85)

8.16.

Asbestos

Asbestos manufactures in general. 8.16.1.

Packing for domestic consignments The supplier’s standard packing materials will be accepted. The supplier must describe in his offer the characteristics of the packing he proposes to use. As a general rule, the following types of packing can be considered to be satisfactory: -

8.16.2.

palletized cartons cardboard boxes (for small quantities) light crates pallets with heat-shrunk plastic and bands

Overseas Type Packing Since the material concerned is highly hygroscopic, items made of asbestos must be protected by safety bags with moisture-absorptive agents and packed in cases.

8.17.

Tiles and cements

Ordinary and refractory tiles Refractory muffles Ordinary and refractory cements 8.17.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Tiles

Ordinary aid refractory tiles should be assembled in a criss-cross pattern, on pallets, wrapped in heat shrunk film and secured with four cross-over straps. The height of the stack must not exceed 1.20 m. Refractory items in general (mufflers for burners, etc.) should be separated by padding of vegetable or artificial fibre, wrapped in polyethylene and packed in cases. Where the particular shape of the items require it, refractory items should be packed in cases.

Cements slabs

Ordinary and refractory cements, which are highly hygroscopic, will be dispatched in ordinary multilayer paper bags arranged cross-wise on pallets. Loaded pallets will be wrapped in heatshrunk film and banded with four cross-straps, with reinforcing guards applied to the corners.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 69 (85)

8.17.2.

8.17.3.

8.18.

Overseas Type Packing Tiles

Ordinary and refractory tiles will be packed in crates in a crisscross pattern. To afford adeguate protection during handling vegetable or artificial fibre material must be inserted between them. Tiles will be protected by coverings of polyethylene. which will allow for the circulation of air. Crates must be strapped. The volume of each crate should be 1 m³ approx. Refractory items in general such as mufflers for burners, specially shaped items. etc., must be separated from one another using vegetable or artificial fibre, and packed in cases.

Cements

Ordinary and refractory cements, which are highly hygroscopic, must be placed in multilayer paper bags and then in a double bag of polyethylene. The bag will be assembled in a criss-cross pattern and packed in crates. If slings are to be used this must be agreed when the order is placed. The use of metal containers with a lid for fastening is not acceptable.

Special overseas Type Packing Tiles

As for overseas type packing (8.17.2.), the only difference being that items must be packed in cases. Refractory items in general (mufflers for burners, etc.), as for overseas packing (8.17.2.).

Cements

As for overseas type packing (8.17.2.), with the difference that items will be packed in cases. The volume of the cases should be 1 m³ approx.

Paving, facing and Floorin g Materials

Small, medium and large paving and facing tiles Moquette Linoleum 8.18.1.

Packgin for Domestic Consignments Small tiles

Small paving and facing tiles will be acceptable packed in ordinary cardboard boxes. The boxes will be palletised, wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene and strapped. This also applies to impact-resistant tiles.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 70 (85)

Larger tiles

Medium-sized and large tiles will be packed tiles in commercialtype crates, arranged on pallets. The pallets will be enclosed in heat shrunk polyethylene and secured with four cross-straps. The height of the pallets must not exceed 1 m. Moquette and linoleum in squares will be dispatched in ordinary cartons and/or palletized.

Moquette and linoleum

Moquette and linoleum in rolls will be wrapped in double-layer polyethylene, sealed with adhesive tape. Maximum acceptable dimensions of rolls are as follows: -

length diam.

: :

4.50 m 0.50 m

The ends of the tube into which the moquette is rolled must be left open to permit movement by fork lift truck. 8.18.2.

Overseas Type Packing Small tile

Small paving and facing tiles will be accepted packed in ordinary cardboard boxes. The boxes will wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene and packed in crates. Crates must be strapped. This also applies to impact-resistant tiles.

Larger tiles

Large arid medium-sized tiles will first be tiles packed in small commercial type crates and then in crates. The volume of the crates should hot exceed 1 m³ approx.

Moquette and alinoleum

Moquette and linoleum in squares will be dispatched in cardboard boxes wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene. The boxes will then be loaded onto pallets, enclosed in heatshrunk polyethylene and secured by 4 cross-straps. Moquette and linoleum in rolls will be wrapped in extra thick double-layer polyethylene and sealed longitudinally and at the ends with high-resistant adhesive tape. The rolls will then be wrapped in artificial raffia. The ends of the tube into which the moquette is rolled must be left open to permit movement by fork lift truck. Maximum acceptable dimensions of rolls are as follows: -

length diam.

: :

4.50 m 0.50 m.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 71 (85)

8.18.3.

8.19.

Special overseas Type Packing Small tiles

As for ordinary overseas type packing (8.18.2), except that the tiles must be packed in cases.

Larger tiles

As for overseas type packing (8.18.2).

Moquette and linoleum

Moquette in squares will be dealt with as provided for at 8.18.2 (overseas type packing), except that they will be packed in crates. Moquette in rolls will be wrapped in the manner prescribed as for overseas packing (8.18.2), and then packed in crates.

Chemical Product s

Chemical products in general Catalyst Reagents Paints, varnishes. primers and solvents Oils and lubricants Bitumes, coaltars, mastics and waterproofing substances Inflammable substances, dangerous substances corrosives, toxic substances, explosives and radioactive substances. Instructions covering all types of packing. Especially dangerous substances, inflammable substances, corrosives, etc. must be identified in the clearest possible manner. In addition to marking and labelling consignments with the appropriate inscriptions and codes (see section 5.1), the supplier must also observe the following instructions: -

60 days before the consignment is due to be dispached, the supplier must send the purchaser a statement explaining the composition of the product and its degree of toxicity, corrosiveness, infiammability, explodability and radioactivity;

-

he must include with the consignment documents, invoice, packing list, etc. a set of instructions and list of precaytions regarding the handling, packing, transport and storage of the product. A copy of these instructions must be enclosed on the inside and outside of each consignment package.

The maximum period of storage for different paints and varnishes, solvents and hardeners must be clearly indicated on the individual containers. Cans must be inscribed in indelible weatherresistant ink. Gummed label s must not be used. Non-waterproof sponge-board must not be used between layers of cans.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 72 (85)

8.19.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Chemical products in general

Chemical products in general, catalysts, etc., will be packed in bags or in steel, PVC or glass container according to the usage general of the supplier. All containers must be hermetically sealed to prevent leakage and the penetration of moisture. Containers up to a capacity of 100 litres must be placed on pallets of standard size and fastened together and to the pallets by means of steel bands. Height of pallets must not exceed 1 metre. Containers (in metal and/or PVC) of over 100 litres capacity will be dispatched loose. Glass containers will be packed in wicker and/or PVC baskets, with appropriate padding, placed on pallets and strapped. Multilayer paper and polyethylene bags should be loaded on pallets, in a criss-cross pattern. The pallets will then be wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene and strapped. Protective guards must be applied to the corners. Smaller packs (cans, canisters, etc.) will be packed in cardboard boxes and loaded onto pallets. The load will be wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene and banded. Containers under vacuum must be marked “UNDER VACUUM” and bear by special instructions that may apply.

Paints and varnishes

Paints and varnishes, solvents, primers, etc., will be packaged according to the usual practices of the supplier in hermetically sealed metal cans. The maximum acceptable capacity for each can is 25 kg. Cans will be packed in cardboard boxes and loaded onto wooden pallets, with the different layers arranged in a crisscross pattern to make the whole more compact. Loaded pallets should not exceed 1 metre in height. The whole package will then be enveloped in a heatshrunk polyethylene bag. Metal or PVC canisters and drums of up to 100 litres capacity will be loaded on pallets, with appropriate banding. Containers of over 100 capacity will be dispatched loose.

Oils and lubrificants

These products will also be accepted as normally packaged by the supplier. Small cans and canisters will be packed in cardboard boxes and loaded onto pallets. The pallets will be protected by heat-shrunk polyethylene and suitably strapped. Canisters and drums of up to 100 litres capacity will be loaded onto pallets, with suitable strapping. Containers of over 100 litres capacity will be dispatched loose.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 73 (85)

8.19.2.

Bitumens

Bitumens, coaltars, mastics and waterproofing products will normally be packaged in polyethylene bags, cans, drums or rolls. These will be loaded onto pallets (with bags and rolls irterspersed), covered with heat shrunk polyethylene and strapped. Loaded pallet must not exceed one metre in height. Individual rolls, before being palletized, must be placed in polyethylene bags.

Radio active materials

Radioactive substances and materials must be packed to comply with current international regulations and those of the user country.

Overseas Type Packing Chemical product in general

For chemical products in general, catalysers, reagents, etc., as for domestic type packing, except that the various containers general and/or bags are to be packed in crates. Containers, in metal or PVC, of over 100 litres capacity must be dispatched loose. Glass containers will be packed in cases, suitably padded. Small packs (cans, canisters, etc.) will be packed in triple-walled natural long-fibre kraft board cardboard boxes. Individual boxes will be protected in heat-shrunk polyethylene and packed in crates, with plenty of strapping. Cans should be marked with indelible weather-resistant inks. Gummed labels must not be used. Non-waterproof sponge board must not be used between layers of cans. Containers under a vacuum must be marked "UNDER VACUUM" and bear any other special instructions that may apply.

Paints and varnishes

Paints and varnishes, solvents, primers, etc., for domestic type packing, except that they will be packed in crates. Containers of over 100 litres capacity will be dispatched loose. Cans and canisters will be packed in waxed board or triple-walled boxes duly wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene. The boxes will then be loaded into crates, which must be well strapped.

Oils and lubricants

Products in smaller tins and canisters will be placed in triple-layer boxes of waxed natural kraft board, wrapped in heat-shrunk polyethylene. The boxes will then be loaded into crates, where they will be given additional protection in the form of polyethylene sheet. Canisters and drums of up to 100 litres capacity will be packed in crates with appropriate strapping. Containers of over 100 litres capacity will be dispatched loose.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 74 (85)

8.19.3.

Bitumens

Bitumens, coaltars, mastics and waterproofing products, as for domestic type packing, except that, after being loaded on pallets. the goods must be placed in crates.

Radioactive materials

Radioactive substances and materials must be packed to comply with current international regulations and those of the user country.

Special overseas Type Packing For all chemical products in general, paints and varnishes, oils and lubricants, bitumens and radioactive materials etc., as for ordinary overseas type packing except that goods will be packed in cases and not in crates. If a product is particularly vulnerable and packaged in bags, a safety bag must also be used. Containers, in metal or PVC of over 100 litres capacity will be sent loose. Containers under a vacuum must be marked “UNDER VACUUM” and bear any other special instructions that may apply.

8.20.

Glass Panes

8.20.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Glass will be packed in wooden crates with a cushioning of vegetable or artificial material between panes and between the panes and the crate. To prevent crates from falling over during storage they must be of sufficient width to ensure their stability without the use of lateral supports. This can be achieved by increasing the gap between the panes inside the crate.

8.20.2.

Overseas Type Packing As for domestic type packing, with the difference that glass panes must be packed in cases. Artificial fibres and not vegetable fibres must be used for cushioning.

8.21.

Offic e, Laboratory and Surgic al Equipm ent

Office machines and equjpment Tools and implements Laboratory and surgery apparatus and equipment Analyzers, mixers, scales, microscopes Radiographic appliances and plates Surgical instruments and first aid equipment Glass manufactures in general Cylinders for laboratory and surgery use, cylinder for welding

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 75 (85)

8.21.1.

8.21.2.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Machines

For office machines and equipment as for “MACHINERY” (section 8.3.).

Tools and implements

Tools and implements will be accepted in their commercial packs, cardboard boxes for individual items or sets, PVC containers, etc, packed in strong cardboard boxes of 50 x 50 x 50 cm max.

Laboratory equipment

For analyzers mixers, scales, microscopes, radiographic appliances and plates, etc., the normal packaging used by the different manufacturers will be accepted. Normally this equipment will be packaged in suitcases, boxes or protective holders in foamed polystyrene of suitable shapes and provided with stabilising devices. It will be sufficient to protect these packs with polyethylene in cardboard boxes. Especially large and heavy equipment, certain analyzers, radiographic appliances, etc., apart from being wrapped in corrugated paper and polyethylene must be packed inwooden crates, with a suitable cushioning of foamed polystyrene panels.

First aid equipment

Surgical instruments and first aid equipment will be dispatched in the standard packs used by the supplier (leather cases, boxes, foamed polystyrene containers) all packed in cardboard boxes.

Glass manufactures

Glass manufactures in general will be dispatched in the standard packs used by the supplier. As a rule, individual items will be protected by paper or some other cushioning material, or placed in suitably shaped foamed polystyrene containers, and then packed in cardboard boxes.

Cylinders

No special packing is necessary. It will be sufficient for protective caps to be provided for the valves. With consignments of any quantity, they will be grouped in batches for dispatch as specified in the order.

Overseas Type Packing Machines

For office machines and equipment, as for "MACHINERY" section 8.3.

Tools and implements

Tools and implements must be greased and individually wrapped in oiled and/or passivating paper before being packed either in cardboard boxes or PVC or foamed polystyrene, etc., containers. These will then be placed inside a protective bag, in which a moisture-absorptive agent has been placed, see section 2.7., and packed in cases.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 76 (85)

8.22.

Laboratory equipment

Analyzers, mixers, scales, microscopes, radiographic appliances, etc. will normally be enclosed in suitably shaped suitcases, boxes and holders of foamed polystyrene and provided with stabilising devices. These packs must be additionally protected by means of polystyrene with entrapped air bubbles and cardboard boxes. The whole must then the inserted in a protective bag, in which a moisture-absorptive agent has been placed, and packed in cases. Especially large and heavy equipment, certain analyzers, radiographic appliances, etc. must be wrapped in polyethylene and enclosed in a protective bag in which moisture-absorptive agent has been placed. Further protection must be provided in the form or foamed polystyrene panels, and the whole will be packed in cases. Equipment will be bolted to the bottom of the case. Radiographic plates in their original boxes must be placed in polyethylene containers which must then be sealed. The plates will then be packed in cases.

First aid equipment

Surgical instruments and first aid equipment will be dispatched in the standard packs used by the supplier, leather cases, boxes, foamed polystyrene containers, etc. The packs must be further protected by being placed in cardboard boxes. a protective bag with a moisture-absorptive agent and then packed in cases.

Glass manufactures

As for overseas type packing, except that manufactures goods must be packed in cases.

Cylinders

Cylinders, with protective caps over the valves, must be packed in crates. With consignments of any quantity they will be grouped in batches for distpach, as specified in the order.

Electri c Household appliances Anid Canteen Equipment

-

Electric household appliance in general, cookers. Refrigerators, washing machines, dishwashing machines, television sets, extraction ventilators. etc.

-

Freezers

-

Comunal dish-washing machines

-

Pots and pans, cutlery.

-

Crochery

-

Tables, chairs, trolleys, general furnishings

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 77 (85)

-

8.22.1.

Serving and kitchen tables, storage units Slicing machines, scales. etc.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Electric household appliance in general

Electric household appliances in general will be accepted in the standard packs used by the supplier, normally consisting of a carton with appropriate cushioning in foamed general polystyrene. Electric household appliances must be wrapped in polyethylene. Cartons must be banded. With large and heavy packages (refrigerators of 150 litres capacity, washing machines, etc.) the cartons must be palletized and strapped firmly.

Freezers

Freezers will be dispatched dismantled. Freezing panels must be wrapped individually in polyethylene banded up in bundles and packed in a crate. Compressor units will be greased, wrapped in polyethylene enclosed in cartons and packed in crates.

Communal dish-washing machines

Communal dish-washing machines with a capacity of up to 1,000 dishes will be wrapped in polyethylene and packed in cardboard boxes. Dishwashers with a higher capacity will be packed in crates.

Pots and pans, cutlery

Pots and pans will be packed in cartons, care being taken to see that items are cushioned. Cutlery will be wrapped in paper and placed in boxes, which will then be put into strong medium-sized cartons, 50 x 50 x 50 cm max, suitably banded.

Crokery

Crokery will be carefully protected with protective material (vegetable fibre, straw, polystyrene, etc.) to prevent breakages and packed in cardboard boxes. The boxes will in turn be packed in crates. For ease of handling, crates must not exceed more than 1 m³ in volume.

Furnishing

Tables, chairs, trolleys and all furnishings in general will be packed in crates. Table tops and chair seats will, where practicable, be dismantled and packed separately, with sheets of corrugated paper in between. Table and chair frames will be wrapped round with rolled crepe paper and interlocked to take up as little space as possible.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 78 (85)

8.22.2.

Serving table

Serving and kitchen tables, cupboards, storage units, etc., will be dispatched with their main components dismantled and packed in crates. AlI chromium-plated and stainless steel parts must be protected with self-adhesive paper. Inside the crates all merchandise will be wrapped in polyethylene and protected with a generous supply of cushioning material. Crates must be lined with sheets of tarred paper.

Slicing machines scales

Slicing machines, scales and similar appliances will be wrapped in polyethylene and enclosed in foamed polystyrene containers. These in turn will be packed in strong triple-walled cardboard boxes long-fibre natural kraft board cardboard boxes.

Overseas Type Packing Electric household Appliances in general

Electric household appliances in general must be protected with sheets of polyethylene containers or casing of foamed polystyrene and cardboard boxes. The whole must then be inserted in a protective bag, with a moisture-absorptive agents and packed in crates.

Freezers

Freezers will be dispatched dismantled. Freezing panels must be individually wrapped in polyethylene and banded up in bundles. These packages will then be enclosed in protective bags with a moisture-absorptive agents and packed in cases. Compressor units will be greased, wrapped in polyethylene, inserted in cartons inside protective bags with a moistureabsorptive agents and then packed in crates.

Communal dish-washing Machine

As for domestic type packing except that appliances will be given additional protection in the form of a protective bag with a moisture-absorptive agent and then packed in cases.

Pots and pans, cutlery

As for domestic type packing except that instead of being packed in cartons merchandise must be packed in cases.

Crockery

As above

Furnishings

As above

Serving tables

Serving and kitchen tables, cupboards and storage units. etc., will be dispatched with main component parts dismantled, and packed in cases. All chromium-plated and stainless steel parts must be protected with self-adhesive waxed paper or similar. Merchandise must be protected inside the cases with polyethylene and a generous quantity of cushioning material, and a protective bag into which a moisture-absorptive agent has been placed.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 79 (85)

Tables, cupboards and storage units, if not fitted with airconditioners, do not require protective bags. Slicing machines scales

8.23. 8.23.

As for domestic type packing, except that cartons must be additionally protected inside a protective bag containing a moisture-absorptive agent, and packed in cases.

Prefabricated Buil ding s

Buts Prefabricated buildings Sanitary fittings Window and door frames Furnishings Shelving and cupboards 8.23.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Huts

Huts can be dispatched assembled or dismantled. It will be jointly decided with the purchaser whether huts are to be dispatched assembled. In either case, huts do not require to be provided with any special packing. If dispatched assembled, huts need only have strips of adhesive tape applied to the windows, and the handles on the outside of the doors should be removed. Sanitary fittings will be secured where they are installed, while the other furnishings will be stowed in an appropriate manner inside the hut itself. If several huts are to be dispatched, it will be best to place all the furnishings in one of the huts, so as to make for better stowage conditions. If huts are to be dispatched dismantled, panels should be assembled in packages bolted together, with layers of polystyrene or some similar spongy material between them to prevent abrasion. The sanitary fittings will be packed in light weight crates. Other accessories, such as mirrors, table, chairs, beds, shelving, cupboards etc., will be protected with crepe paper and polyethylene and packed in cartons and/or light weight crates. For further details see under “furnishing” in this section.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 80 (85)

Pre-fabricated building

Sanitary fittings

8.23.2.

Pre-fabricated buildings will be dispatched fabricated with their main components and equipment, wall units, flooring and roofing, air-conditioning and electrical fittings, etc.), dismantled. All parts must be dispatched on the basis of a single consignment. Wall, flooring and roofing elements will be assembled into packages, bolted together, and with panels of soft material in between to prevent abrasion. Packages must not exceed 6,000 to 7,000 kg in weight. Glazed frames for the walls to be assembled on site will be packed with the glass and sections in separate crates. For glass panes see section 8.20 and for frames section 8.11. Frames will be protected by self-adhesive paper. Sanitary fittings will be packed in cartons and/or crates.

Door and window frames

Door and window frames in wood and aluminium will be wrapped in polyethylene, banded into packages and packed in crates. Aluminium frames will be given additional protection in the form of self-adhesive paper.

Furnishings

Furniture and general furnishings will be wrapped in polyethylene and packed in cartons (if not too large) and/or crates. Items must be held firm inside the cartons and crates and protected by cushioning to prevent them from being broken or scratched.

Shelving and cupboards

Shelving in general will be dispatched dismantled and packed in crates. Frames will be wrapped in crepe paper and packed assembled in bundles. Shelves will be wrapped separately in polyethylene and assembled in packages, with soft material in between. In the case al cupboards fitted with backs the various components will be dismantled, wrapped in polyethylene sheet andl assembled in packages. Spacers of soft material must be interposed between them. The packages will be strapped with bands of synthetic material and packed in light-weight crates.

Overseas Type Packing Huts

As for domestic type packing, with the following differences: -

if huts are dispatched dismounted, sanitary fittings must be packed in cases;

-

for furnishings, tables, chairs, beds, shelving,cupboards, etc. see under “Furnishings” in this section.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 81 (85)

Pre-fabricated buildings

8.24.

As for domestic type packing, with the following differences: -

panels, assembled into packages and secured, will be wrapped in polyethylene and packed in crates.

-

sections of glazed frames to be assembled on site will be tied into bundles and packed in cases. For further details see 8.11.2.

-

glass panes will be packed in separate cases according to the directions given at 8.11.2.

-

fittings for air-conditioning plant installations will be packed in cases.

and

electric

power

Sanitary fitting

Sanitary fittings will be packed in cases, suitably cushioned by artificial wool and panels of foamed polystyrene.

Door and windows frames

As for domestic type packing, except that the merchandise will be packed in cases, suitably cushioned with artificial wool and panels of foamed polystyrene.

Furnishings

Furniture and general furnishings will be wrapped in polyethylene, enclosed in cartoons and packed in cases. Items must be helf firm and well cushioned inside the cartons and cases to prevent breakages and scratches.

Shelving and cupboards

Shelving in general and cupboards will be and dismantled, prepacked as specified for cupboards domestic type packing and then packed in cases.

Caravans

Caravans Mobile workshops and laboratories 8.24.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Caravans

Caravans will as a rule be dispatched without packing. The usual precautions should be taken to guard against the theft of detachable parts and the penetration of moisture. The towing bracket should be protected and adhesive tape should be affixed to the window areas. All detachable furnishing fu rnishing should be wrapped in paper and packed in cartons. Cartons will be stowed inside the caravan in such a way that they cannot be displaced during transport.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(85) Sheet 82 (85)

Mobile workshops and laboratories

8.24.2.

8.25. 8.25.

As instructions for caravans. If there are any items of equipment or appliances that are liable to shift during transport they must be packed in cases of the type used for domestic consignments. These cases must then the stowed together inside the mobile workshop or laboratory concerned.

Overseas Type Packing Caravans

As for domestic type packing except that any detachable furnishings will be packed in cartons which will in turn be placed in cases.

Mobile workshop and laboratories

As for domestic type packing, except that items of equipment or appliances liable to shift during transport should be packed in cases.

Operatio Operatio nal Machinery and Appl iance

Operational machinery and appliances (self-propelled cranes, etc.) Roadmaking machinery (dumpers, excavators, mechanical shovels, cement mixers, etc.) Fire engines Lift trucks 8.25.1

Packing for Domestic Consignments Machines, appliances and vehicles in this category will be dispatched without any special packing. The appropriate lifting points must be indicated. Crane arms, if possible, should be dismantled and forwarded separately. Cables and ropes will be greased and dispatched separately. All working parts should be positioned in such a way that they take up the minimum of space, and must be firmly secured. Other forms of protection can be adopted in accordance with the manufacturer's experience. All parts that are not fixed, such as tool cases, accessories, and so on, will be forwarded separately. If they are not in container fitted with a lock, they will be packed in cases. Spare parts will be sent packed in cases. see section 8.26.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 83 (85)

8.26.

Miscell aneous – Spare Parts

Rubber matting for belt conveyors Project models Mechanical books Stationery, photocopying paper Spare parts 8.26.1.

Packing for Domestic Consignments Rubber matting

Rubber matting for belt conveyors must be wound on drums. The final layer will be protected by polyethylene sheet. The drum will be bolted and closed in with staves.

Project models

Project models will be dispatched in special cases made of plywood, 5 ply - 8 mm, strengtned by load-bearing beams as per drawing No. 25. The sides will be secured together and to the bottom by means of coach screws, to facilitate removal of the model. The sides and lid of the case must be completely lined on the inside with waxed or tarred paper. A safety window in plexiglass, fitted with grating, will be constructed in one of the sides to allow for customs inspection. The model will be bolted to the bottom of the case and held in place by small blocks as shown in the sketch. The lid and bottom of the case will be in 3 cm thick chipboard. Unless otherwise agreed, after boards have been secured between the cases and before these are finally closed, any empty space between the model and the sides and top of the case must be filled with foamed polystyrene. The following should be placed inside the case: a)

3 draughtsman's scales.

b)

Miscellaneous material, including piping and glue far small repairs.

Mechanical book

Mechanical books will be protected by a polyethylene bag and packed in strong double or triple layer, long-fibre natural kraft board cardbaard boxes.

Stationary

Stationary in general and photocopying paper will be dispatched in standard, moisture resistant cardboard boxes packs used by the supplier. With large consignments, cartons must be loaded an pallets, duly banded and protected by heat-shrunk polyethylene.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 84 (85)

Spare parts

8.26.2.

Spare parts must be protected in such a way that they can be warehoused in a damp locality without risk of damage, corrosion or loss of properties for a minimum period of 2 years. They must also be thoroughly greased; and individually wrapped in oiled or passivating paper. Both spares supplied as standard by the manufacturer together with the basic equipment and those that are the subject of an additional order or contract must the packed in cases. Specific parts can be packed in containers, other than cases, in accordance with the supplier's standard procedure. Each spare must be packed individually and identified with a tag or label showing the order number, type and factory number of equipment to which they belong, as well as the name of the piece and the number and description used in the section an spares far the main item of equipment. Spares that are supplied by the manufacturer as standard with the basic machine will be dispatched together with the latter in the type of packing that applies. Cases of spares will further be marked with the inscription “SPARE”.

Overseas Type Packing Rubber matting

As for domestic type packing

Project models

As for domestic type packing. To ensure that the sides and bottom of the case are held more firmly together, a cleat must be fixed to the bottom on the inside to which the sides can be screwed.

Mechanical books

As far domestic type packing with the following additional precautions: cartons should be protected by means of a protective bag in which a moisture-absorptive agent has been placed and packed in cases.

Stationery

Stationery in generaI and photocopying paper will be dispatched in standard, moisture resistant cardboard boxes packs used by the supplier. The boxes will be additionally protected by being placed in a protective bag in which a moisture-absorptive agent has been placed and then packed in cases.

Spare part

As for domestic type packing, but with the additional precaution that special care must be taken over the protection of each part., grasing. and wrapping in passivating waxed paper etc. Spares must be placed in cartons, enclosed in a protective bag together with a moisture absorptive agent and finally packed in cases.

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 85 (85)

Revision Memorandum

Rev. 0

Issue

Rev. 1

General Revision

Rev. 2

General Revision

Rev. 3 Lug.80

General Revision

Rev. 4 Ott. 05

General Revision

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 1 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 2 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 3 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 4 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 5 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 6 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 7 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 8 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 9 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 10 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(25) Sheet 11 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(25) Sheet 12 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(25) Sheet 13 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(25) Sheet 14 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

(25) Sheet 15 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 16 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 17 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 18 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 19 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 20 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 21 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 22 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 23 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 24 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005

Sheet 25 (25)

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 1 (1)

Al l. N° 26 (not headed p aper)

CONTENT LIST (1) (example)

MARKING (2)

FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF XXXXX XXXXX REFINERY order 135100/OR 4270 content VALVES case NO. 1/4 net kg 1035 gross kg 1175 dimensions cm 230 x 110 x 80 h storage “B” HANDLE WITH CARE DON’T TURN OVER

MATERIALS (detail ed li st) Item of order 1

(1)

Lubricated plug valves ASTM-A-105 gr. 1 steel 2” Ø – with hardened steel plug, socket welding ends, and relative 30 wrenches

WEIGHT kg Quantity

Net

Gross

30

1.035

1.175

The data given above, regarding Consignee and content of packages, are given only as example and therefore have nothing to do with any order.

(2) Marking listed above shall be an exact copy of the markings on each colis.

$


Date

Oct. 2005 Sheet 1 (1)

Al l. N° 27 (not headed p aper)

PACKING LIST(1) (example)

MARKING (2)

FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF XXXXX XXXXX REFINERY order 135100/OR 4270 content ………….. case NO. ………../4 net kg …………… gross kg …………. dimensions cm …… x ….. x …… h storage “B” HANDLE WITH CARE DON’T TURN OVER

LOT’S TOTAL DATA

1 case 1 crate 2 bundles

NET GROSS

kg. 2.016 kg. 2.179

VOLUME cub. meters 8 PACKAGE No.

q.ty

type

MATERIALS

sizes cm Lenthg width height diameter

Item of order

WEIGHT kg Q.ty

Net

Gross

1/2

1 case

230 x 110 x 80

1

Plug valves ASTM-AGR.1 – 2” Ø and relative wrenches

30

1035

1175

2/4

1 crate

120 x 85 x 75

2

Globe valves Ø 4” – 300 RTJ

2

191

214

3/4

1 bundle

600 x 80 Ø

3

Tee beam carbon steel mm 50 x 25 x 5

40

470

470

4/4

1 bundle

800 x 40 Ø

4

Carbon steel tube ¾“

24

320

320

(1)

The data given above, regarding Consignee and contents of packages, are given only as example and therefore have nothing to do with any order.

(2)

Marking listed above shall be an exact copy of the markings on each colis.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 36 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 2 International Standard for Phytosanitary Measures – Revision of ISPM N° 15 – Regulation of wood packaging material in international trading 2009 (English & Spanish version)

Regulation of wood packaging material in international trade

ISPM 15

ISPM 15

INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS FOR PHYTOSANITARY MEASURES

ISPM 15

REGULATION OF WOOD PACKAGING MATERIAL IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE (2009)

Produced by the Secretariat of the International Plant Protection Convention

Publication history This is not an official part of the standard 1999-10 ICPM-2 added topic Wood packing (1999-001) 2000-06 ad-hoc EWG developed draft text 2001-02 EWG developed draft text 2001-05 ISC-3 revised draft text and approved for MC 2001-06 Sent for MC 2001-11 ISC-4 revised draft text for adoption 2002-03 ICPM-4 adopted standard ISPM 15. 2002. Guidelines for regulating wood packaging material in international trade. Rome, IPPC, FAO. 2005-03 TPFQ revised Annex 1 Methyl bromide fumigation schedule (2005-011) 2005-05 SC revised Annex1 and approved for MC 2005-06 Sent for MC under fast-track process 2005-11 SC revised Annex 1 for adoption 2006-04 CPM-1 adopted revised Annex 1 ISPM 15. 2006. Guidelines for regulating wood packaging material in international trade. Rome, IPPC, FAO. 2006-04 CPM-1 added topic Revision of ISPM No. 15 (2006-036) 2006-05 SC approved Specification 31 Revision of ISPM No. 15 2007-07 TPFQ revised standard 2008-05 SC revised and approved for MC 2008-06 Sent for MC 2008-11 SC revised standard for adoption 2009-03 CPM-4 adopted revised standard ISPM 15. 2009. Regulation of wood packaging material in international trade. Rome, IPPC, FAO.


ISPM 15

CONTENTS Adoption............................................................................................................................................. 15-5 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 15-5 Scope .................................................................................................................................................. 15-5 Environmental Statement ................................................................................................................... 15-5 References .......................................................................................................................................... 15-5 Definitions .......................................................................................................................................... 15-6 Outline of Requirements .................................................................................................................... 15-6 REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................................. 15-7 1.

Basis for Regulation.................................................................................................................... 15-7

2.

Regulated Wood Packaging Material.......................................................................................... 15-7 2.1

3.

4.

Exemptions.................................................................................................................. 15-7

Phytosanitary Measures for Wood Packaging Material.............................................................. 15-7 3.1

Approved phytosanitary measures .............................................................................. 15-8

3.2

Approval of new or revised treatments ....................................................................... 15-8

3.3

Alternative bilateral arrangements .............................................................................. 15-8

Responsibilities of NPPOs .......................................................................................................... 15-9 4.1

Regulatory considerations ........................................................................................... 15-9

4.2

Application and use of the mark ................................................................................. 15-9

4.3

Treatment and marking requirements for wood packaging material that is reused, repaired or remanufactured ......................................................................................... 15-9

4.3.1

Reuse of wood packaging material ............................................................................. 15-9

4.3.2

Repaired wood packaging material ............................................................................. 15-9

4.3.3

Remanufactured wood packaging material ............................................................... 15-10

4.4

Transit ....................................................................................................................... 15-10

4.5

Procedures upon import ............................................................................................ 15-10

4.6

Phytosanitary measures for non-compliance at point of entry .................................. 15-10

ANNEX 1: Approved treatments associated with wood packaging material................................... 15-12 ANNEX 2: The mark and its application ......................................................................................... 15-14 APPENDIX 1: Examples of methods of secure disposal of non-compliant wood packaging material ................................................................................................................. 15-17

ISPM 15



ISPM 15

Adoption This standard was first adopted by the Fourth Session of the Interim Commission on Phytosanitary Measures in March 2002 as Guidelines for regulating wood packaging material in i nternational trade. Modifications to Annex 1 were adopted by the First Session of the Commission on Phytosanitary Measures in April 2006. The first revision was adopted by the Fourth Session of the Commission on Phytosanitary Measures in March–April 2009 as the present standard, ISPM 15:2009.

INTRODUCTION Scope This standard describes phytosanitary measures that reduce the risk of introduction and spread of quarantine pests associated with the movement in international trade of wood packaging material made from raw wood. Wood packaging material covered by this standard includes dunnage but excludes wood packaging made from wood processed in such a way that it is free from pests (e.g. plywood). The phytosanitary measures described in this standard are not intended to provide ongoing protection from contaminating pests or other organisms.

Environmental Statement Pests associated with wood packaging material are known to have negative impacts on forest health and biodiversity. Implementation of this standard is considered to reduce significantly the spread of pests and subsequently their negative impacts. In the absence of alternative treatments being available for certain situations or to all countries, or the availability of other appropriate packaging materials, methyl bromide treatment is included in this standard. Methyl bromide is known to deplete the ozone layer. An IPPC Recommendation on the Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure (CPM, 2008) has been adopted in relation to this issue. Alternative treatments that are more environmentally friendly are being pursued.

References CPM. 2008. Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure. IPPC Recommendation. In Report of the Third Session of the Commission on Phytosanitary Measures, Rome, 7–11 April 2008 , Appendix 6. Rome, IPPC, FAO. IPPC. 1997. International Plant Protection Convention. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISO 3166-1:2006. Codes for the representation of names of countries and their subdivisions – Part 1: Country codes. Geneva, International Organization for Standardization (available at http://www.iso.org/iso/country_codes/iso_3166_code_lists.htm). ISPM 5. Glossary of phytosanitary terms. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 7. 1997. Export certification system. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 20. 2004. Guidelines for a phytosanitary import regulatory system. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 23. 2005. Guidelines for inspection. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 13. 2001. Guidelines for the notification of non-compliance and emergency action. Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 25. 2006. Consignments in transit . Rome, IPPC, FAO. ISPM 28. 2007. Phytosanitary treatments for regulated pests. Rome, IPPC, FAO.

ISPM 15


UNEP. 2000. Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer . Nairobi, Ozone Secretariat, United Nations Environment Programme. ISBN: 92-807-1888-6 (http://www.unep.org/ozone/pdfs/Montreal-Protocol2000.pdf).

Definitions Definitions of phytosanitary terms used in this standard can be found in ISPM 5 (Glossary of phytosanitary terms).

Outline of Requirements Approved phytosanitary measures that significantly reduce the risk of pest introduction and spread via wood packaging material consist of the use of debarked wood (with a specified tolerance for remaining bark) and the application of approved treatments (as prescribed in Annex 1). The application of the recognized mark (as prescribed in Annex 2) ensures that wood packaging material subjected to the approved treatments is readily identifiable. The approved treatments, the mark and its use are described. The national plant protection organizations (NPPOs) of exporting and importing countries have specific responsibilities. Treatment and application of the mark must always be under the authority of the NPPO. NPPOs that authorize the use of the mark should supervise (or, as a minimum, audit or review) the application of the treatments, use of the mark and its application, as appropriate, by producer/treatment providers and should establish inspection or monitoring and auditing procedures. Specific requirements apply to wood packaging material that is repaired or remanufactured. NPPOs of importing countries should accept the approved phytosanitary measures as the basis for authorizing entry of wood packaging material without further wood packaging material-related phytosanitary import requirements and may verify on import that the requirements of the standard have been met. Where wood packaging material does not comply with the requirements of this standard, NPPOs are also responsible for measures implemented and notification of non-compliance, as appropriate.


ISPM 15

REQUIREMENTS 1.

Basis for Regulation

Wood originating from living or dead trees may be infested by pests. Wood packaging material is frequently made of raw wood that may not have undergone sufficient processing or treatment to remove or kill pests and therefore remains a pathway for the introduction and spread of quarantine pests. Dunnage in particular has been shown to present a high risk of introduction and spread of quarantine pests. Furthermore, wood packaging material is very often reused, repaired or remanufactured (as described in section 4.3). The true origin of any piece of wood packaging material is difficult to determine, and thus its phytosanitary status cannot easily be ascertained. Therefore the normal process of undertaking pest risk analysis to determine if measures are necessary, and the strength of such measures, is frequently not possible for wood packaging material. For this reason, this standard describes internationally accepted measures that may be applied to wood packaging material by all countries to reduce significantly the risk of introduction and spread of most quarantine pests that may be associated with that material.

2.

Regulated Wood Packaging Material

These guidelines cover all forms of wood packaging material that may serve as a pathway for pests posing a pest risk mainly to living trees. They cover wood packaging material such as crates, boxes, 1 packing cases, dunnage , pallets, cable drums and spools/reels, which can be present in almost any imported consignment, including consignments that would not normally be subject to phytosanitary inspection.

2.1

Exemptions 2

The following articles are of sufficiently low risk to be exempted from the provisions of this standard : -

wood packaging material made entirely from thin wood (6 mm or less in thickness)

-

wood packaging made wholly of processed wood material, such as plywood, particle board, oriented strand board or veneer that has been created using glue, heat or pressure, or a combination thereof

-

barrels for wine and spirit that have been heated during manufacture

-

gift boxes for wine, cigars and other commodities made from wood that has been processed and/or manufactured in a way that renders it free of pests

-

sawdust, wood shavings and wood wool

-

wood components permanently attached to freight vehicles and containers.

3.

Phytosanitary Measures for Wood Packaging Material

This standard describes phytosanitary measures (including treatments) that have been approved for wood packaging material and provides for the approval of new or revised treatments. 1

Consignments of wood (i.e. timber/lumber) may be supported by dunnage that is constructed from wood of the same type and quality and that meets the same phytosanitary requirements as the wood in the consignment. In such cases, the dunnage may be considered as part of the consignment and may not be considered as wood packaging material in the context of this standard. 2

Not all types of gift boxes or barrels are constructed in a manner that renders them pest free, and therefore certain types may be considered to be within the scope of this standard. Where appropriate, specific arrangements related to these types of commodities may be established between importing and exporting

ISPM 15

3.1


Approved phytosanitary measures

The approved phytosanitary measures described in this standard consist of phytosanitary procedures including treatments and marking of the wood packaging material. The application of the mark renders the use of a phytosanitary certificate unnecessary as it indicates that the internationally accepted phytosanitary measures have been applied. These phytosanitary measures should be accepted by all NPPOs as the basis for authorizing the entry of wood packaging material without further specific requirements. Required phytosanitary measures beyond an approved measure as described in this standard require technical justification. The treatments described in Annex 1 are considered to be significantly effective against most pests of living trees associated with wood packaging material used in international trade. These treatments are combined with the use of debarked wood for construction of wood packaging, which also acts to reduce the likelihood of reinfestation by pests of living trees. These measures have been adopted based on consideration of: -

the range of pests that may be affected

-

the efficacy of the treatment

-

the technical and/or commercial feasibility.

There are three main activities involved in the production of approved wood packaging material (including dunnage): treating, manufacturing and marking. These activities can be done by separate entities, or one entity can do several or all of these activities. For ease of reference, this standard refers to producers (those that manufacture the wood packaging material and may apply the mark to appropriately treated wood packaging material) and treatment providers (those that apply the approved treatments and may apply the mark to appropriately treated wood packaging material). Wood packaging material subjected to the approved measures shall be identified by application of an official mark in accordance with Annex 2. This mark consists of a dedicated symbol used in conjunction with codes identifying the specific country, the responsible producer or treatment provider, and the treatment applied. Hereafter, all components of such a mark are referred to collectively as “the mark”. The internationally recognized, non-language-specific mark facilitates identification of treated wood packaging material during inspection prior to export, at the point of entry, or elsewhere. NPPOs should accept the mark as referred to in Annex 2 as the basis for authorizing the entry of wood packaging material without further specific requirements. Debarked wood must be used for the construction of wood packaging material, in addition to application of one of the adopted treatments specified in Annex 1. A tolerance for remaining bark is specified in Annex 1.

3.2

Approval of new or revised treatments

As new technical information becomes available, existing treatments may be reviewed and modified, and new alternative treatments and/or treatment schedule(s) for wood packaging material may be adopted by the CPM. ISPM 28:2007 provides guidance on the IPPC’s process for approval of treatments. If a new treatment or a revised treatment schedule is adopted for wood packaging material and incorporated into this ISPM, material already treated under the previous treatment and/or schedule does not need to be re-treated or re-marked.

3.3

Alternative bilateral arrangements

NPPOs may accept measures other than those listed in Annex 1 by bilateral arrangement with their trading partners. In such cases, the mark shown in Annex 2 must not be used unless all requirements of this standard have been met.


4.

ISPM 15

Responsibilities of NPPOs

To meet the objective of preventing the introduction and spread of pests, exporting and importing contracting parties and their NPPOs have responsibilities (as outlined in Articles I, IV and VII of the IPPC). In relation to this standard, specific responsibilities are outlined below.

4.1

Regulatory considerations

Treatment and application of the mark (and/or related systems) must always be under the authority of the NPPO. NPPOs that authorize use of the mark have the responsibility for ensuring that all systems authorized and approved for implementation of this standard meet all necessary requirements described within the standard, and that wood packaging material (or wood that is to be made into wood packaging material) bearing the mark has been treated and/or manufactured in accordance with this standard. Responsibilities include: -

authorization, registration and accreditation, as appropriate

-

monitoring treatment and marking systems implemented in order to verify compliance (further information on related responsibilities is provided in ISPM 7:1997)

-

inspection, establishing verification procedures and auditing where appropriate (further information is provided in ISPM 23:2005).

The NPPO should supervise (or, as a minimum, audit or review) the application of the treatments, and authorize use of the mark and its application as appropriate. To prevent untreated or insufficiently/incorrectly treated wood packaging material bearing the mark, treatment should be carried out prior to application of the mark.

4.2

Application and use of the mark

The specified marks applied to wood packaging material treated in accordance with this standard must conform to the requirements described in Annex 2.

4.3

Treatment and marking requirements for wood packaging material that is reused, repaired or remanufactured

NPPOs of countries where wood packaging material that bears the mark described in Annex 2 is repaired or remanufactured have responsibility for ensuring and verifying that systems related to export of such wood packaging material comply fully with this standard.

4.3.1 Reuse of wood packaging material A unit of wood packaging material that has been treated and marked in accordance with this standard and that has not been repaired, remanufactured or otherwise altered does not require re-treatment or reapplication of the mark throughout the service life of the unit.

4.3.2 Repaired wood packaging material Repaired wood packaging material is wood packaging material that has had up to approximately one third of its components removed and replaced. NPPOs must ensure that when marked wood packaging material is repaired, only wood treated in accordance with this standard is used for the repair, or wood constructed or fabricated from processed wood material (as described in section 2.1). Where treated wood is used for the repair, each added component must be individually marked in accordance with this standard. Wood packaging material bearing multiple marks may create problems in determining the origin of the wood packaging material if pests are found associated with it. It is recommended that NPPOs of countries where wood packaging material is repaired limit the number of different marks that may

ISPM 15


packaging material is repaired may require the repaired wood packaging material to have previous marks obliterated, the unit to be re-treated in accordance with Annex 1, and the mark then applied in accordance with Annex 2. If methyl bromide is used for the re-treatment, the information in the IPPC Recommendation on the Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure (CPM, 2008) should be taken into account. In circumstances where there is any doubt that all components of a unit of repaired wood packaging material have been treated in accordance with this standard, or the origin of the unit of wood packaging material or its components is difficult to ascertain, the NPPOs of countries where wood packaging material is repaired should require the repaired wood packaging material to be re-treated, destroyed, or otherwise prevented from moving in international trade as wood packaging material compliant with this standard. In the case of re-treatment, any previous applications of the mark must be permanently obliterated (e.g. by covering with paint or grinding). After re-treatment, the mark must be applied anew in accordance with this standard.

4.3.3 Remanufactured wood packaging material If a unit of wood packaging material has had more than approximately one third of its components replaced, the unit is considered to be remanufactured. In this process, various components (with additional reworking if necessary) may be combined and then reassembled into further wood packaging material. Remanufactured wood packaging material may therefore incorporate both new and previously used components. Remanufactured wood packaging material must have any previous applications of the mark permanently obliterated (e.g. by covering with paint or grinding). Remanufactured wood packaging material must be re-treated and the mark must then be applied anew in accordance with this standard.

4.4

Transit

Where consignments moving in transit have wood packaging material that does not meet the requirements of this standard, NPPOs of countries of transit may require measures to ensure that wood packaging material does not present an unacceptable risk. Further guidance on transit arrangements is provided in ISPM 25:2006.

4.5

Procedures upon import

Since wood packaging materials are associated with most shipments, including those not considered to be the target of phytosanitary inspections in their own right, cooperation by NPPOs with organizations not usually involved with verification of whether the phytosanitary import requirements have been met is important. For example, cooperation with Customs organizations and other stakeholders will help NPPOs in receiving information on the presence of wood packaging material. This is important to ensure effectiveness in detecting potential non-compliance of wood packaging material.

4.6

Phytosanitary measures for non-compliance at point of entry

Relevant information on non-compliance and emergency action is provided in sections 5.1.6.1 to 5.1.6.3 of ISPM 20:2004, and in ISPM 13:2001. Taking into account the frequent re-use of wood packaging material, NPPOs should consider that the non-compliance identified may have arisen in the country of production, repair or remanufacture, rather than in the country of export or transit. Where wood packaging material does not carry the required mark, or the detection of pests provides evidence that the treatment may not have been effective, the NPPO should respond accordingly and, if necessary, an emergency action may be taken. This action may take the form of detention while the 3 situation is being addressed then, as appropriate, removal of non-compliant material, treatment , 3


ISPM 15

destruction (or other secure disposal) or reshipment. Further examples of appropriate options for actions are provided in Appendix 1. The principle of minimal impact should be pursued in relation to any emergency action taken, distinguishing between the consignment traded and the accompanying wood packaging material. In addition, if emergency action is necessary and methyl bromide is used by the NPPO, relevant aspects of the IPPC Recommendation on Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure (CPM, 2008) should be followed. The NPPO of the importing country should notify the exporting country, or the manufacturing country where applicable, in cases where live pests are found. In such cases, where a unit of wood packaging material bears more than one mark NPPOs should attempt to determine the origin of the noncompliant component(s) prior to sending a notice of non-compliance. NPPOs are also encouraged to notify cases of missing marks and other cases of non-compliance. Taking into account the provisions of section 4.3.2, it should be noted that the presence of multiple marks on a single unit of wood packaging does not constitute non-compliance.

Regulation of wood packaging material in international trade - Annex 1

ISPM 15

This annex is a prescriptive part of the standard.

ANNEX 1: Approved treatments associated with wood packaging material Use of debarked wood

Irrespective of the type of treatment applied, wood packaging material must be made of debarked wood. For this standard, any number of visually separate and clearly distinct small pieces of bark may remain if they are: -

less than 3 cm in width (regardless of the length) or

-

greater than 3 cm in width, with the total surface area of an individual piece of bark less than 50 square cm.

For methyl bromide treatment the removal of bark must be carried out before treatment because the presence of bark on the wood affects the efficacy of the methyl bromide treatment. For heat treatment, the removal of bark can be carried out before or after treatment. Heat treatment (treatment code for the mark: HT)

Wood packaging material must be heated in accordance with a specific time–temperature schedule that achieves a minimum temperature of 56 °C for a minimum duration of 30 continuous minutes throughout the entire profile of the wood (including at its core). Various energy sources or processes may be suitable to achieve these parameters. For example, kiln-drying, heat-enabled chemical pressure impregnation, microwave or other treatments may all be considered heat treatments provided that they meet the heat treatment parameters specified in this standard. Methyl bromide treatment (treatment code for the mark: MB)

Use of methyl bromide should be undertaken taking into account the IPPC Recommendation Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure (CPM, 2008). 4 NPPOs are encouraged to promote the use of alternative treatments approved in this standard. The wood packaging material must be fumigated with methyl bromide in accordance with a schedule 5 that achieves the minimum concentration-time product (CT) over 24 hours at the temperature and final residual concentration specified in Table 1. This CT must be achieved throughout the wood, including at its core, although the concentrations would be measured in the ambient atmosphere. The minimum temperature of the wood and its surrounding atmosphere must be not less than 10 °C and the minimum exposure time must be not less than 24 hours. Monitoring of gas concentrations must be carried out at a minimum at 2, 4 and 24 hours (in the case of longer exposure times and weaker concentrations, additional measurement should be recorded at the end of fumigation). Table 1: Minimum CT over 24 hours for wood packaging material fumigated with methyl bromide CT (g∙h/m ) over 24 h

3

Minimum final concentration 3 (g/m ) after 24 h

21 °C or above

650

24

16 °C or above

800

28

10 °C or above

900

32

Temperatu re

One example of a schedule that may be used for achieving the specified requirements is shown in Table 2.

4

In addition, contracting parties to the IPPC may also have obligations under the Montreal Protocol on Substances that deplete the Ozone Layer (UNEP, 2000). 5

The CT product utilized for methyl bromide treatment in this standard is the sum of the product of the 3


ISPM 15

Table 2: Example of a treatment schedule that achieves the minimum required CT for wood packaging material treated with methyl bromide (initial doses may need to be higher in conditions of high sorption or leakage) Temperature

3

Dosage (g/m )

3

Minimum concentration (g/m ) at: 2h

4h

24 h

21 °C or above

48

36

31

24

16 °C or above

56

42

36

28

10 °C or above

64

48

42

32

NPPOs shall ensure that the following factors are appropriately addressed by those involved in the application of methyl bromide treatment under this standard: (1)

Fans are used as appropriate during the gas distribution phase of fumigation to ensure that equilibrium is reached and should be positioned to ensure that the fumigant is rapidly and effectively distributed throughout the fumigation enclosure (preferably within one hour of application).

(2)

Fumigation enclosures are not loaded beyond 80% of their volume.

(3)

Fumigation enclosures are well sealed and as gas tight as possible. If fumigation is to be carried out under sheets, these must be made of gas-proof material and sealed appropriately at seams and at floor level.

(4)

The fumigation site floor is either impermeable to the fumigant or gas-proof sheets must be laid on the floor.

(5)

Methyl bromide is often applied through a vaporizer (‘hot gassing’) in order to fully volatilize the fumigant prior to its entry into the fumigation enclosure.

(6)

Methyl bromide treatment is not carried out on wood packaging material exceeding 20 cm in cross section. Wood stacks need separators at least every 20 cm to ensure adequate methyl bromide circulation and penetration.

(7)

When calculating methyl bromide dosage, compensation is made for any gas mixtures (e.g. 2% chloropicrin) to ensure that the total amount of methyl bromide applied meets required dosage rates.

(8)

Initial dose rates and post-treatment product handling procedures take account of likely methyl bromide sorption by the treated wood packaging material or associated product (e.g. polystyrene boxes).

(9)

The measured temperature of the product or the ambient air (whichever is the lower) is used to calculate the methyl bromide dose, and must be at least 10 °C (including at the wood core) throughout the duration of the treatment.

(10) Wood packaging material to be fumigated is not wrapped or coated in materials impervious to the fumigant. (11) Records of methyl bromide treatments are retained by treatment providers, for a period of length determined and as required by the NPPO, for auditing purposes. NPPOs should recommend that measures be taken to reduce or eliminate emissions of methyl bromide to the atmosphere where technically and economically feasible (as described in the IPPC Recommendation on Replacement or reduction of the use of methyl bromide as a phytosanitary measure (CPM, 2008)). Adoption of alternative treatments and revisions of approved treatment schedules

As new technical information becomes available, existing treatments may be reviewed and modified, and alternative treatments and/or new treatment schedule(s) for wood packaging material may be adopted by the CPM. If a new treatment or a revised treatment schedule is adopted for wood packaging material and incorporated into this ISPM, material treated under the previous treatment and/or schedule does not need to be re-treated or re-marked.


ISPM 15

This annex is a prescriptive part of the standard.

ANNEX 2: The mark and its application A mark indicating that wood packaging material has been subjected to approved phytosanitary 6 treatment in accordance with this standard comprises the following required components: -

the symbol

-

a country code

-

a producer/treatment provider code

-

a treatment code using the appropriate abbreviation according to Annex 1 (HT or MB).

Symbol

The design of the symbol (which may have been registered under national, regional or international procedures, as either a trademark or a certification/collective/guarantee mark) must resemble closely that shown in the examples illustrated below and must be presented to the left of the other components. Country code

The country code must be the International Organization for Standards (ISO) two-letter country code (shown in the examples as “XX”). It must be separated by a hyphen from the producer/treatment provider code. Producer/treatment provider code

The producer/treatment provider code is a unique code assigned by the NPPO to the producer of the wood packaging material or treatment provider who applies the marks or the entity otherwise responsible to the NPPO for ensuring that appropriately treated wood is used and properly marked (shown in the examples as “000”). The number and order of digits and/or letters are assigned by the NPPO. Treatment code

The treatment code is an IPPC abbreviation as provided in Annex 1 for the approved measure used and shown in the examples as “YY”. The treatment code must appear after the combined country and producer/treatment provider codes. It must appear on a separate line from the country code and producer/treatment provider code, or be separated by a hyphen if presented on the same line as the other codes. Treatment code

Treatment type

HT

Heat treatment

MB

Methyl bromide

Application of the mark

The size, font types used, and position of the mark may vary, but its size must be sufficient to be both visible and legible to inspectors without the use of a visual aid. The mark must be rectangular or square in shape and contained within a border line with a vertical line separating the symbol from the code components. To facilitate the use of stencilling, small gaps in the border, the vertical line, and elsewhere among the components of the mark, may be present. No other information shall be contained within the border of the mark. If additional marks (e.g. trademarks of the producer, logo of the authorizing body) are considered useful to protect the use of 6

At import, countries should accept previously produced wood packaging material carrying a mark consistent


ISPM 15

the mark on a national level, such information may be provided adjacent to but outside of the border of the mark. The mark must be: -

legible

-

durable and not transferable

-

placed in a location that is visible when the wood packaging is in use, preferably on at least two opposite sides of the wood packaging unit.

The mark must not be hand drawn. The use of red or orange should be avoided because these colours are used in the labelling of dangerous goods. Where various components are integrated into a unit of wood packaging material, the resultant composite unit should be considered as a single unit for marking purposes. On a composite unit of wood packaging material made of both treated wood and processed wood material (where the processed component does not require treatment), it may be appropriate for the mark to appear on the processed wood material components to ensure that the mark is in a visible location and is of a sufficient size. This approach to the application of the mark applies only to composite single units, not to temporary assemblies of wood packaging material. Special consideration of legible application of the mark to dunnage may be necessary because treated wood for use as dunnage may not be cut to final length until loading of a conveyance takes place. It is important that shippers ensure that all dunnage used to secure or support commodities is treated and displays the mark described in this annex, and that the marks are clear and legible. Small pieces of wood that do not include all the required elements of the mark should not be used for dunnage. Options for marking dunnage appropriately i nclude: -

application of the mark to pieces of wood intended for use as dunnage along their entire length at very short intervals (NB: where very small pieces are subsequently cut for use as dunnage, the cuts should be made so that an entire mark is present on the dunnage used.)

-

additional application of the mark to treated dunnage in a visible location after cutting, provided that the shipper is authorized in accordance with section 4.

The examples below illustrate some acceptable variants of the required components of the mark that i s used to certify that the wood packaging material that bears such a mark has been subjected to an approved treatment. No variations in the symbol should be accepted. Variations in the layout of the mark should be accepted provided that they meet the requirements set out in this annex. Example 1

ISPM 15


Example 2

Example 3 (This represents a prospective example of a mark with the border with rounded corners.)

Example 4 (This represents a prospective example of a mark applied by stencilling; small gaps may be present in the border, and the vertical line, and elsewhere among the components of the mark.)

Example 5

Example 6

Regulation of wood packaging material in international trade - Appendix 1

ISPM 15

This appendix is for reference purposes only and is not a prescriptive part of the standard.

APPENDIX 1: Examples of methods of secure disposal of non-compliant wood packaging material Secure disposal of non-compliant wood packaging material is a risk management option that may be used by the NPPO of the importing country when an emergency action is either not available or is not desirable. The methods listed below are recommended for the secure disposal of non-compliant wood packaging material: (1)

incineration, if permitted

(2)

deep burial in sites approved by appropriate authorities (NB: the depth of burial may depend on climatic conditions and the pest intercepted, but is recommended to be at least 2 metres. The material should be covered immediately after burial and should remain buried. Note, also, that deep burial is not a suitable disposal option for wood infested with termites or some root pathogens.)

(3)

processing (NB: Chipping should be used only if combined with further processing in a manner approved by the NPPO of the importing country for the elimination of pests of concern, e.g. the manufacture of oriented strand board.)

(4)

other methods endorsed by the NPPO as effective for the pests of concern

(5)

return to exporting country, if appropriate.

In order to minimize the risk of introduction or spread of pests, secure disposal methods where required should be carried out with the least possible delay.

NIMF n.° 15

NORMAS INTERNACIONALES PARA MEDIDAS FITOSANITARIAS

Revisión de la NIMF n.° 15 REGLAMENTACIÓN DEL EMBALAJE DE MADERA UTILIZADO EN EL COMERCIO INTERNACIONAL (2009)

ÍNDICE ACEPTACIÓN INTRODUCCIÓN ÁMBITO DECLARACIÓN MEDIOAMBIENTAL REFERENCIAS DEFINICIONES PERFIL DE LOS REQUISITOS PERFIL DE LOS REQUISITOS 1. Fundamento para la reglamentación 2. 2.1

Embalaje de madera reglamentado Exenciones

3. 3.1 3.2 3.3

Medidas fitosanitarias para el embalaje de madera Medidas fitosanitarias aprobadas Aprobación de tratamientos nuevos o revisados Acuerdos bilaterales

4. 4.1 4.2 4.3

Responsabilidades de las ONPF Consideraciones normativas Aplicación y uso de la marca Requisitos de tratamiento y marcado para el embalaje de madera que se reutiliza, repara o recicla 4.3.1 Reutilización del embalaje de madera 4.3.2 Embalaje de madera reparado 4.3.3 Embalaje de madera reciclado 4.4 Tránsito 4.5 Procedimientos para la importación 4.6 Medidas en caso de incumplimiento en el punto de ingreso ANEXO 1 Tratamientos aprobados que están asociados con el embalaje de madera ANEXO 2 La marca y su aplicación APÉNDICE 1 Ejemplos de métodos de eliminación segura del embalaje de madera que no cumpla con la norma

ACEPTACIÓN La presente norma fue aceptada por la Comisión de Medidas Fitosanitarias en abril de 2009. INTRODUCCIÓN ÁMBITO La presente norma describe las medidas fitosanitarias que disminuyen el riesgo de introducción y/o dispersión de plagas cuarentenarias asociadas con la movilización en el comercio internacional de embalaje de madera fabricado de madera en bruto. El embalaje de madera regulado por esta norma incluye la madera de estiba, pero excluye el embalaje fabricado con madera procesada de tal forma que quede libre de plagas (p.ej. madera contrachapada). Las medidas fitosanitarias descritas en esta norma no tienen el propósito de prestar protección continua contra las plagas contaminantes u otros organismos.

DECLARACIÓN MEDIOAMBIENTAL Es sabido que las plagas asociadas al material de embalaje de madera tienen efectos negativos en la sanidad y la biodiversidad de los bosques. Se considera que la aplicación de esta norma reducirá en medida apreciable la propagación de las plagas y, sucesivamente, sus efectos negativos. En ausencia de tratamientos alternativos disponibles para determinadas situaciones o para todos los países, o para el caso de que no se disponga de otros embalajes apropiados, esta norma contempla el tratamiento con bromuro de metilo. Es sabido que el bromuro de metilo destruye la capa de ozono, y en relación con este problema la CIPF ha adoptado una recomendación titulada Reemplazo o reducción del uso de bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria (2008). Se están buscando tratamientos alternativos que sean más inocuos para el medio ambiente.

REFERENCIAS Envíos en tránsito, 2006. NIMF n.° 25, FAO, Roma. Sistema de certificación para la exportación, 1997. NIMF n.° 7, FAO, Roma. Glosario de términos fitosanitarios, 2008. NIMF n.° 5, FAO, Roma. Directrices sobre un sistema fitosanitario de reglamentación de importaciones,

2004.

NIMF n.° 20, FAO, Roma. Directrices para la inspección, 2005. NIMF n.°23, FAO, Roma Directrices para la notificación de incumplimiento y acción de emergencia,

2001.

NIMF n.° 13, FAO, Roma. ISO 3166-1-alpha-2 code elements (http://www.iso.org/iso/english_country_names_and_code_elements). Convención Internacional de Protección Fitosanitaria, 1997, FAO, Roma. Tratamientos fitosanitarios para plagas reglamentadas, 2007 NIMF n.° 20, FAO, Roma Reemplazo o reducción del uso de bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria, 2008. Recomendación de la CIPF, FAO, Roma.

, 2000. Secretaría del Ozono, Programa de las Naciones Unidas para el Medio Ambiente. ISBN: 92-807-1888-6 (http://www.unep.org/ozone/pdfs/Montreal-Protocol2000.pdf ). Protocolo de Montreal relativo a las sustancias que agotan la capa de ozono

DEFINICIONES Las definiciones de los términos fitosanitarios utilizados en esta norma se pueden encontrar en la NIMF n. º 5 ( Glosario de términos fitosanitarios , 2008). PERFIL DE LOS REQUISITOS Las medidas fitosanitarias aprobadas que disminuyen considerablemente el riesgo de introducción y dispersión de plagas a través del embalaje de madera consisten en el uso de madera descortezada (con una tolerancia especificada para la corteza restante) y en la aplicación de tratamientos aprobados (según se prescribe en el Anexo 1). La aplicación de una marca reconocida (según se prescribe en el Anexo 2) asegura la rápida identificación del embalaje de madera que ha sufrido los tratamientos aprobados. Se describen aquí los tratamientos aprobados, la marca y su utilización. Las organizaciones nacionales de protección fitosanitaria (ONPF) de los países exportadores e importadores tienen responsabilidades específicas. El tratamiento y la aplicación de la marca deben realizarse siempre bajo la autoridad de la ONPF. Las ONPF que autoricen el uso de la marca deberían supervisar (o bien, como mínimo, comprobar o examinar) la aplicación de los tratamientos, el uso de la marca y su aplicación, según sea apropiado, por los productores o suministradores del tratamiento, y deberían establecer procedimientos de inspección o de monitoreo y verificación. Al embalaje de madera que se reutilice, repare o recicle se aplicarán requisitos específicos. La ONPF del país importador debería aceptar las medidas fitosanitarias aprobadas como fundamento para autorizar la entrada del embalaje de madera sin exigir requisitos fitosanitarios adicionales para la importación con respecto al material de embalaje, y podría verificar en el momento de la importación que se hayan cumplido los requisitos estipulados en la norma. A las ONPF también les compete la aplicación de medidas cuando el embalaje de madera no cumpla con los requisitos indicados en esta norma, así como la notificación de tal incumplimiento según sea apropiado.

PERFIL DE LOS REQUISITOS 1. Fundamento para la reglamentación La madera, provenga de árboles vivos o muertos, puede estar infestada de plagas. Con frecuencia se utiliza madera en bruto para el embalaje de madera, y puede ocurrir que dicha madera no sea sometida a procesamiento o tratamiento suficiente para eliminar o matar las plagas, con lo que sigue constituyendo una vía para la introducción y dispersión de plagas cuarentenarias. Se ha demostrado, en particular, que la madera de estiba presenta un riesgo alto de introducción y propagación de plagas cuarentenarias. Además, el embalaje de madera es muy a menudo reutilizado, reparado o reciclado (según se describe en el apartado 4.3). Resulta difícil establecer el verdadero origen de una pieza de embalaje de madera, de manera que no es fácil determinar su estado fitosanitario. Por ende, el proceso normal de efectuar un análisis de riesgo de plagas con el fin de determinar la necesidad de adoptar medidas y la intensidad con que han de aplicarse es, con frecuencia, imposible para el embalaje de madera. Por tal motivo, la presente norma describe las medidas aceptadas y aprobadas en el ámbito internacional que todos los países podrán aplicar al embalaje de madera para disminuir considerablemente el riesgo de introducción y dispersión de la mayoría de las plagas cuarentenarias que puedan estar asociadas con dicho material. 2. Embalaje de madera reglamentado Estas directrices se aplican a todo tipo de embalaje de madera que pueda representar una vía para las plagas que suponen una amenaza principalmente para los árboles vivos. Esto incluye el embalaje de madera como jaulas, cajas, cajones, madera de estiba , paletas, tambores de cable y carretes, material que puede acompañar a casi cualquier envío importado, incluso los que normalmente no son objeto de inspección fitosanitaria. 1

2.1 Exenciones Los siguientes artículos presentan un riesgo suficientemente bajo como para quedar exentos de la aplicación de las disposiciones de la presente norma : embalaje de madera fabricado completamente de madera delgada (6 mm o menos de espesor) embalaje de madera fabricado en su totalidad de material de madera sometida a procesamiento, como el contrachapado, los tableros de partículas, los tableros de fibra orientada o las hojas de chapa que se producen utilizando pegamento, calor o presión, o una combinación de los mismos barriles para vino y licores que se han calentado durante la fabricación cajas de regalo para vino, cigarros y otros productos fabricados con madera que ha sido procesada y/o fabricada de tal forma que queden libres de plagas el aserrín, las virutas y lana de madera componentes de madera instalados en forma permanente en los vehículos o contenedores empleados para fletes. 2

1

Los envíos de madera (troncos, madera aserrada) pueden estar sostenidos por material de estiba hecho de madera del mismo tipo y calidad que los del envío, y que cumple los mismos requisitos fitosanitarios. En tales casos la madera de estiba se considerará como parte del envío y puede no considerarse material de embalaje de madera en el contexto de la presente norma. 2

No todos los tipos de cajas de regalo o barriles están construidos de manera que queden libres de plagas, y por tanto se podrá considerar que algunos de ellos están comprendidos en el ámbito de esta norma. Cuando sea apropiado las ONPF del país exportador e importador podrán concertar acuerdos específicos para estos tipos de

3. Medidas fitosanitarias para el embalaje de madera Esta norma describe las medidas fitosanitarias (incluidos los tratamientos) que se han aprobado para el embalaje de madera, e incluye disposiciones para la aprobación de tratamientos nuevos o revisados. 3.1 Medidas fitosanitarias aprobadas Las medidas fitosanitarias aprobadas que se describen en esta norma consisten en procedimientos fitosanitarios que incluyen los tratamientos y el marcado del embalaje de madera. La aplicación de la marca hace innecesario el uso de certificación fitosanitaria, puesto que indica que se han aplicado medidas fitosanitarias aceptadas internacionalmente. Todas las organizaciones nacionales de protección fitosanitaria (ONPF) deberían aceptar estas medidas fitosanitarias como fundamento para autorizar la entrada del embalaje de madera sin exigir el cumplimiento de requisitos específicos. El requerimiento de medidas fitosanitarias que vayan más allá de una medida aprobada descrita en esta norma exige una justificación técnica. Se considera que los tratamientos descritos en el Anexo 1 tienen una eficacia significativa contra la mayoría de las plagas asociadas con el embalaje de madera que se utiliza en el comercio internacional. Estos tratamientos han sido adoptados tomando en cuenta las siguientes consideraciones: la variedad de plagas que puedan verse afectadas la eficacia del tratamiento la viabilidad técnica y/o comercial. La producción del material de embalaje de madera aprobado (incluida la madera de estiba) comporta tres actividades principales: tratamiento, fabricación y marcado. Estas pueden ser realizadas por tres entidades diferentes, o bien puede haber una entidad que lleve a cabo varias de estas actividades o incluso todas. Para facilitar la exposición, esta norma se refiere a los productores (los que fabrican el material de embalaje de madera y podrán aplicar la marca a la madera tratada en forma apropiada) y los suministradores de tratamientos (los que dan los tratamientos aprobados y podrán aplicar la marca al embalaje de madera tratado en forma apropiada). El embalaje de madera que haya sido objeto de las medidas aprobadas se identificará mediante la aplicación de una marca oficial en conformidad con el Anexo 2. La marca consiste en un símbolo especial que se utiliza junto con los códigos que identifican al país específico, al productor o suministrador responsable del tratamiento y al tratamiento aplicado. En lo sucesivo, todos los elementos de dicha marca se mencionan de manera conjunta como “la marca”. Una marca reconocida internacionalmente e igual para todos los idiomas facilita la identificación del material de embalaje tratado durante la inspección previa a la exportación, en el punto de ingreso o en cualquier otro lugar. Las ONPF deberían aceptar la marca que figura en el Anexo 2 como el fundamento para autorizar la entrada del embalaje de madera sin exigir requisitos específicos adicionales. Además de la aplicación de uno de los tratamientos aprobados, en la construcción de embalaje de madera debe utilizarse madera descortezada, según lo especificado en el Anexo 1. En dicho anexo se especifica asimismo una tolerancia para la corteza restante.

3.2 Aprobación de tratamientos nuevos o revisados La Comisión de Medidas Fitosanitarias (CMF) podrá revisar y modificar los tratamientos en vigor cuando se disponga de información técnica nueva, y adoptar tratamientos o programas de tratamiento alternativos para el embalaje de madera. La NIMF n.º 28 ( Tratamientos fitosanitarios para plagas reglamentadas 2007) contiene orientación sobre el proceso de aprobación de trabamientos por parte de la CIPF. En caso de que se adopte un nuevo tratamiento o un programa de tratamiento revisado para el material de embalaje de madera y los mismos se incorporen a esta NIMF, no será necesario someter a nuevo tratamiento ni volver a marcar el material que ha sufrido ya el tratamiento antes vigente. 3.3 Acuerdos bilaterales alternativos Las ONPF podrán aceptar medidas diferentes de las enumeradas en el Anexo 1 mediante acuerdo bilateral con sus asociados comerciales. En estos casos, no se debe utilizar la marca que figura en el Anexo 2 salvo que se cumplan todos los requisitos de esta norma. 4. Responsabilidades de las ONPF Con el fin de prevenir la introducción y propagación de plagas, las partes contratantes exportadoras e importadoras y sus ONPF tienen determinadas responsabilidades (según se esbozan en los Artículos I, IV y VII de la CIPF). Se indican más abajo las obligaciones relacionadas específicamente con esta norma 4.1 Consideraciones normativas El tratamiento y la aplicación de la marca (o los sistemas conexos) siempre deben realizarse bajo la autoridad de la ONPF competente. La ONPF que autorice el uso de la marca tienen la obligación de asegurarse de que todos los sistemas autorizados para la implementación de esta norma cumplan todos los requisitos necesarios que se describen en la misma, y que el embalaje de madera (o la madera que se ha de utilizar para fabricarlo) que exhiba la marca haya recibido tratamiento y/o se haya fabricado en conformidad con esta norma. Las obligaciones comprenden: la autorización, el registro y la acreditación, según sea apropiado; el monitoreo de los sistemas de tratamiento y marcado con el fin de verificar el cumplimiento (la NIMF n.° 7 titulada Sistema de certificación para la exportación, 1997, contiene más información sobre las responsabilidades pertinentes) la inspección, el establecimiento de procedimientos de verificación y la comprobación correspondiente cuando sea apropiado (la NIMF n.° 23 titulada Directrices para la inspección, 2005, contiene más información al respecto). La ONPF debería supervisar (o, como mínimo, comprobar o revisar) la aplicación de los tratamientos, y autorizar el uso de la marca y su aplicación según sea apropiado. El tratamiento debería darse antes de que se aplique la marca, con el fin de evitar que la exhiba embalaje de madera que haya recibido un tratamiento insuficiente o incorrecto.

4.2 Aplicación y uso de la marca Las marcas especificadas que se apliquen a embalaje de madera que haya recibido tratamiento en conformidad con esta norma deben ajustarse a los requisitos

4.3 Requisitos de tratamiento y marcado para el embalaje de madera que se reutiliza, repara o recicla Las ONPF de países donde se haya reparado o reciclado embalaje de madera que lleve la marca descrita en el Anexo 2 tienen la obligación de asegurar y verificar que los sistemas relacionados con la exportación de dicho embalaje de madera cumplan plenamente con esta norma. 4.3.1 Reutilización del embalaje de madera Si una unidad de embalaje de madera que ha recibido tratamiento y se ha marcado en conformidad con esta norma no ha sido reparada, reciclada o alterada de alguna otra forma, no será necesario que reciba nuevo tratamiento o marcado durante la vida útil de la unidad. 4.3.2 Embalaje de madera reparado El embalaje de madera reparado es aquel del que se han quitado y reemplazado hasta un tercio, aproximadamente, de sus elementos. Las ONPF deben asegurarse de que, cuando se repare embalaje de madera marcado, se utilice para ello únicamente madera que ha recibido tratamiento de conformidad con esta norma, o madera construida o fabricada a partir de material procesado (según se describe en la sección 2.1). Si se utiliza madera tratada para la reparación, cada componente añadido debe llevar la marca en conformidad con esta norma. Una unidad de embalaje de madera que exhiba numerosas marcas podrá plantear problemas para la determinación del origen del embalaje de madera si se encuentran plagas asociadas al mismo. Se recomienda que las ONPF de los países en que se repara el embalaje de madera limiten el número de marcas distintas que pueden aparecer en cada unidad de embalaje de madera. Así pues, la ONPF de un país exportador podrá exigir que se obliteren las marcas anteriores, se vuelva a tratar la unidad y se aplique luego la marca en conformidad con el Anexo 2. En caso de que para el nuevo tratamiento se utilice bromuro de metilo se deberá tener en cuenta la información contenida en la recomendación de la CIPF Reemplazo o reducción del uso de bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria (2008). En circunstancias en que haya alguna duda de que todos los elementos de la unidad de embalaje de madera reparado han recibido tratamiento en conformidad con esta norma, o bien sea difícil determinar el origen de la unidad de embalaje de madera o de sus componentes, las ONPF de los países donde se repare el embalaje deberían exigir que el embalaje de madera reparado reciba tratamiento nuevamente, que sea destruido o que se impida de alguna otra forma su circulación comercial como material de embalaje de madera conforme a esta norma. En caso de que se repita el tratamiento, toda marca aplicada antes debe obliterarse en forma permanente (por ejemplo, cubriéndose con pintura o esmerilándose). Después del nuevo tratamiento debe aplicarse otra vez la marca en conformidad con esta norma.

4.3.3 Embalaje de madera reciclado Si se reemplaza más de un tercio, aproximadamente, de los componentes de una unidad de embalaje de madera se considerará que la unidad se ha reciclado. En este proceso se podrán combinar y volver a armar varios elementos (con adaptaciones adicionales, de ser necesario) para formar otro embalaje de madera. El reciclado del

embalaje de madera podrá, por consiguiente, incluir tanto elementos nuevos como ya utilizados previamente. En el embalaje de madera reciclado debe obliterarse en forma permanente toda aplicación anterior de la marca (por ejemplo, cubriéndola con pintura o esmerilándola). El embalaje de madera reciclado debe recibir tratamiento nuevamente y luego debe aplicarse otra vez la marca en conformidad con esta norma.

4.4 Tránsito Cuando existan envíos en tránsito con embalaje de madera que no cumpla con los requisitos de esta norma, las ONPF de los países por los envíos que transitan podrán exigir medidas que aseguren que el embalaje de madera no comporte un riesgo inaceptable. La NIMF n.° 25 ( Envíos en tránsito, 2006) proporciona orientación adicional sobre las disposiciones relativas al tránsito . 4.5 Procedimientos para la importación Debido a que el embalaje de madera está asociado con la mayoría de los cargamentos, incluso con aquellos que no se considera que deban por derecho propio ser objeto de inspecciones fitosanitarias, es fundamental la cooperación de las ONPF con organizaciones que, por lo general, no tienen que verificar si se han cumplido los requisitos de importación. Por ejemplo, la colaboración con las organizaciones aduaneras y otros interesados directos ayudará a las ONPF a obtener información sobre la presencia de embalaje de madera. Esta información es importante para asegurar la eficacia de la detección de embalaje de madera con posibilidades de no cumplir los requisitos. 4.6 Medidas fitosanitarias en caso de incumplimiento en el punto de ingreso Los apartados 5.1.6 a 5.1.6.3 de la NIMF n.° 20 ( Directrices sobre un sistema fitosanitario de reglamentación de importaciones , 2004) y la NIMF n.° 13 ( Directrices para la notificación de incumplimiento y acción de emergencia , 2001) contienen información sobre el incumplimiento y las medidas de emergencia. Tomando en cuenta la frecuente reutilización del embalaje de madera, las ONPF deberían considerar que el incumplimiento detectado puede no haberse producido en el país de exportación o en el de tránsito sino en el de producción, reparación o reciclado. Si el embalaje de madera no exhibe las marcas exigidas, o la detección de plagas demuestra que el tratamiento puede no haber sido eficaz, la ONPF debería responder como corresponde y podrán adoptarse medidas de emergencia si es necesario. Estas medidas podrán consistir en la detención del envío en espera de que se aborde la situación, el retiro del material que no cumpla los requisitos, el tratamiento , la destrucción (u otra forma de eliminación segura) o el reenvío. En el Apéndice 1 figuran más ejemplos de opciones apropiadas respecto de las medidas que han de adoptarse. Toda medida de emergencia debería guiarse por el principio de impacto mínimo, manteniendo la distinción entre el envío comercial y el de embalaje de madera que lo acompaña. Además, en caso de que se haga necesaria una acción de emergencia y la ONPF utilice bromuro de metilo deberían respetarse las disposiciones 3

pertinentes de la recomendación de la CIPF Reemplazo o reducción del bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria (2008). La ONPF del país importador debería notificar al país exportador o al país de fabricación, según corresponda, los casos en que se encuentren plagas vivas. En tales casos, si una unidad de embalaje de madera exhibe más de una marca las ONPF deberían tratar de determinar el origen del elemento o elementos no conformes antes de enviar la notificación de incumplimiento. También se exhorta a las ONPF a notificar los casos de marcas faltantes y otros casos de incumplimiento. Teniendo en cuenta lo dispuesto en la sección 4.3.2, cabe observar que la presencia de muchas marcas en una unidad de embalaje de madera no constituye incumplimiento.

ANEXO 1 TRATAMIENTOS APROBADOS QUE ESTÁN ASOCIADOS CON EL EMBALAJE DE MADERA Uso de madera descortezada Independientemente del tipo de tratamiento que se aplique, el material de embalaje de madera debe estar hecho de madera descortezada. A los efectos de esta norma podrá quedar cualquier número de pedazos pequeños de corteza visualmente separados y claramente distinguibles que midan: menos de 3 centímetros de ancho (sin importar la longitud) o más de 3 centímetros de ancho, a condición de que la superficie total de cada trozo de corteza sea inferior a 50 centímetros cuadrados. Para el tratamiento con bromuro de metilo la eliminación de la corteza debe realizarse antes del tratamiento, ya que la presencia de corteza en la madera afecta a la eficacia del tratamiento. En el caso del tratamiento térmico la corteza puede eliminarse antes o después del tratamiento.

Tratamiento térmico (código de tratamiento para la marca: HT) El embalaje de madera debe calentarse conforme a un programa específico de tiempo/temperatura, mediante el cual el centro de la madera alcance una temperatura mínima de 56° C durante un período de la duración mínima de 30 minutos continuos en todo el perfil de la madera (incluida su parte central). Podrán existir diversas fuentes de energía o procesos idóneos para alcanzar estos parámetros. Por ejemplo, tanto el secado en estufa como la impregnación química a presión inducida mediante calor, las microondas y otros tratamientos podrán considerarse como tratamientos térmicos siempre que se ajusten a los parámetros para tratamiento térmico especificados en esta norma. El Apéndice 2 contiene orientación adicional para la realización de un tratamiento térmico eficaz.

Tratamiento con bromuro de metilo (código de tratamiento para la marca: MB) Respecto del uso de bromuro de metilo se debería tener en cuenta la recomendación de la CIPF ( Reemplazo o reducción del bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria , 2008. Se exhorta a las ONPF a promover el uso de los tratamientos alternativos aprobados en esta norma . 4

El embalaje de madera debe fumigarse con bromuro de metilo en conformidad con un programa que alcance la concentración-tiempo mínima del producto (CT) en 24 horas a la temperatura y concentración residual finales especificadas en el Cuadro 1. Esta CT debe alcanzarse en toda la madera, incluida su parte central, aunque las concentraciones se midan en la atmósfera ambiente. La temperatura mínima de la madera y de la atmósfera que la circunda no debe ser inferior a 10 ºC y 5

4

Además, las partes contratantes en la CIPF pueden tener obligaciones en el marco del Protocolo de Montreal relativo a las sustancias que agotan la capa de ozono. 5

La CT del producto utilizada para el tratamiento con bromuro de metilo que figura en esta norma es la suma del

el tiempo de exposición mínimo no debe ser inferior a 24 horas. Deben realizarse controles de la concentración, como mínimo, después de 2, 4 y 24 horas (en caso de tiempo de exposición mayor o concentraciones inferiores se debería registrar una medición adicional al final de la fumigación).

Cuadro 1: CT mínima durante 24 horas para el embalaje de madera fumigado con bromuro de metilo Temperatura

CT (g·h/m3) durante 24 h

21oC o superior 16oC o superior 10oC o superior

650 800 900

Concentración final mínima (g/m3) después de 24 horas 24 28 32

En el Cuadro 2 figura un ejemplo de un programa que podrá utilizarse para alcanzar los requisitos especificados. Cuadro 2: Ejemplo de un programa de tratamiento que alcanza la CT mínima exigida para embalaje de madera que ha recibido tratamiento con bromuro de metilo (en condiciones de sorción o drenaje elevados podrán necesitarse dosis iniciales más altas).

Temperatura

Dosis (g/m3)

21°C o mayor 16°C o mayor 10°C o mayor

48 56 64

Registros mínimos de concentración (g/m3) para: 24 h 2h 4h 36 42 48

31 36 42

24 28 32

Las ONPF se asegurarán de que quienes participan en la aplicación de tratamientos con bromuro de metilo en el marco de esta norma aborden en forma apropiada los siguientes factores: 1. Utilización apropiada de ventiladores durante la fase de distribución del gas de la fumigación, para lograr que esta sea equilibrada; los ventiladores se colocarán de tal forma que el fumigante se distribuya en forma rápida y eficaz en todo el recinto (preferiblemente en el término de una hora después de la fumigación). 2. Los recintos de fumigación no deben llenarse hasta más del 80% de su volumen. 3. Los recintos de fumigación deben estar bien sellados y ser tan herméticos al gas como sea posible. Si la fumigación ha de realizarse bajo láminas, estas deben estar hechas de material que no deje pasar el gas y cerrar perfectamente tanto en las costuras como con el suelo 4. El piso del lugar de fumigación debe ser impermeable al fumigante, o bien debe cubrirse con láminas a prueba de gas. 5. El bromuro de metilo se suele aplicar con un vaporizador (gas caliente) para volatilizar completamente el fumigante antes de que el mismo entre al recinto de fumigación. 6. El tratamiento con bromuro de metilo no debe realizarse en embalaje de madera que exceda los 20 cm en sección cruzada. Las pilas de madera

7.

8.

9.

10. 11.

Cuando se calcula la dosis de bromuro de metilo, se debe compensar cualquier mezcla de gas (por ejemplo, 2% cloropicrina) a fin de garantizar que la cantidad total de bromuro de metilo aplicada corresponda a las dosis requeridas Las dosis iniciales y los procedimientos de manipulación del producto después del tratamiento toman en cuenta la posible sorción de bromuro de metilo por el embalaje de madera que ha recibido tratamiento o productos relacionados (por ejemplo, cajas de poliestireno). La temperatura medida en el producto o en el aire ambiental (el más bajo entre ambos valores) se utilizará para calcular la dosis del bromuro de metilo, y debe ser por lo menos de 10°C (incluso en el centro de la madera) por toda la duración del tratamiento. El embalaje de madera que ha de fumigarse no debe envolverse ni cubrirse con materiales impermeables al fumigante. Los suministradores del tratamiento con bromuro de metilo deben conservar los registros del tratamiento para fines de comprobación, por un período determinado y según lo exija la ONPF competente.

Las ONPF deberían recomendar la adopción de medidas para reducir o eliminar las emisiones de bromuro de metilo en la atmósfera cuando esto sea posible desde el punto de vista técnico y económico (con arreglo a lo descrito en la recomendación de la CIPF Reemplazo o reducción del bromuro de metilo como medida fitosanitaria, 2008).

Adopción de tratamientos alternativos y revisión de los programas de tratamiento aprobados Cuando se disponga de nueva información técnica, los tratamientos disponibles podrán revisarse o modificarse y la Comisión de Medidas Fitosanitarias podrá adoptar tratamientos alternativos o nuevos programas de tratamiento para el material de embalaje de madera. Si se adopta un nuevo tratamiento o un programa de tratamiento revisado y el mismo se incorpora a esta NIMF, no será necesario que el material sometido al tratamiento o el programa antes en vigor vuelva a tratarse o sea marcado nuevamente.

LA MARCA Y SU APLICACIÓN

ANEXO 2 6

Una marca que indique que el embalaje de madera se ha sometido a un tratamiento fitosanitario aprobado en conformidad con esta norma comprende necesariamente los siguientes elementos: símbolo código de país código del productor/el suministrador del tratamiento código del tratamiento, para lo cual se utilizará la abreviatura apropiada con arreglo al Anexo 1 (HT o MB)

Símbolo El diseño del símbolo (el cual podrá haberse inscrito según procedimientos nacionales, regionales o internacionales, ya sea como marca registrada o marca de certificación/colectiva/de garantía) debe asemejarse mucho al que se muestra en los ejemplos ilustrados abajo y debe aparecer a la izquierda de los otros elementos. Código de país El código de país debe ser el código de dos letras de la Organización Internacional de Normalización (ISO), (en los ejemplos figuran como “XX”). Debe separarse con un guión del código del productor/suministrador del tratamiento. Código del productor/suministrador del tratamiento El código del productor/suministrador del tratamiento es un código especial que la ONPF asigna al productor o el suministrador del tratamiento del material de embalaje de madera que aplique las marcas, o a otra entidad que sea responsable ante la ONPF de garantizar que se utilice madera sometida al tratamiento apropiado y correctamente marcada (en los ejemplos la marca figura como “000”). La ONPF asigna el número y orden de los dígitos y/o letras. Código del tratamiento El código del tratamiento es una abreviatura de la CIPF que figura en el Anexo 1 para la medida aprobada utilizada, y aparece en los ejemplos como "YY". El código del tratamiento debe aparecer después de la combinación de códigos del país y del productor/administrador del tratamiento, en una línea distinta de la de los mencionados códigos del país y el productor/administrador del tratamiento o bien separado de estos por un guión, en caso de que aparezca en la misma línea. Código del tratamiento HT MB

Tipo de tratamiento Tratamiento térmico Bromuro de metilo

Aplicación de la marca El tamaño, los tipos de letra y la posición de la marca podrán variar, pero su tamaño debe ser suficiente para que resulte visible y legible a los inspectores sin necesidad de una ayuda visual. La marca debe tener forma rectangular o cuadrada y estar 6

A efectos de la importación los países deberían aceptar el embalaje de madera producido anteriormente que lleve

contenida dentro de un borde con una línea vertical que separe los símbolos de los elementos del código. Para facilitar el uso de una plantilla se podrán admitir la presencia de espacios vacíos pequeños en el borde y la línea vertical, así como en otras partes de los elementos que componen la marca. No habrá otro tipo de información dentro del borde de la marca. En caso de que se considere útil la aplicación de marcas adicionales (marca registrada del productor, símbolo del organismo que otorga la autorización) para proteger el uso de la marca a nivel nacional, dicha información podrá figurar cerca del borde de la marca, pero fuera de él. La marca debe: ser legible ser duradera y no transferible colocarse en un lugar que quede visible durante el empleo del embalaje de madera, de preferencia al menos en dos lados opuestos de la unidad de embalaje. La marca no debe dibujarse a mano. Los colores rojo y naranja deberían evitarse, puesto que se utilizan para identificar las mercaderías peligrosas. Cuando una unidad de embalaje de madera comprenda varios elementos, el conjunto resultante debería considerarse como una sola unidad para los fines del marcado. Para una unidad compuesta de embalaje de madera fabricada tanto con madera que ha recibido tratamiento como con madera procesada (cuando el elemento procesado no requiera tratamiento) podrá ser apropiado que la marca aparezca en los elementos de madera procesada para asegurar que la marca se encuentre en un lugar visible y sea de buen tamaño. Este se aplica solo para la aplicación de la marca a unidades compuestas, y no a conjuntos transitorios de material de embalaje de madera. El marcado legible de la madera de estiba podrá requerir especial atención, debido a que la madera que ha recibido tratamiento para utilizarse como madera de estiba puede no cortarse a la longitud final hasta que se cargue en el medio de transporte. Es importante que el consignador se asegure de que toda la madera de estiba que se utilice para fijar o apoyar los productos haya recibido tratamiento y exhiba la marca que se describe en este anexo, y que las marcas sean claras y legibles. No deberían utilizarse como madera de estiba piezas pequeñas de madera que no exhiban todos los elementos de la marca. Entre las opciones para el marcado apropiado de la madera de estiba figuran: la aplicación de la marca a intervalos muy cortos en toda la longitud de los pedazos de madera que se piensa destinar a madera de estiba (NB: cuando posteriormente se corten pedazos muy pequeños para utilizarse como madera de estiba, los cortes deberían hacerse de tal forma que se presente una marca completa en la madera de estiba utilizada). una nueva aplicación de la marca tras el corte de la madera de estiba que ha recibido tratamiento, en un lugar visible, siempre que el consignador esté autorizado a tal efecto en consonancia con la sección 4.

Los siguientes ejemplos muestran algunas variantes aceptables de los elementos necesarios de la marca que se utiliza para certificar que el embalaje de madera que exhiba dicha marca se ha sometido a un tratamiento aprobado. No deberían aceptarse variaciones en el símbolo. Las variaciones en la presentación de la marca deberían aceptarse a condición de que se ajusten afg los requisitos establecidos en este anexo. Ejemplo 1

XX - 000

Ejemplo 2

XX 000 Ejemplo 3 (representa una posible marca de bordes y esquinas redondeadas)

XX - 000 - YY

Ejemplo 4 (representa una posible marca aplicada mediante plantilla; podrá haber pequeños espacios vacíos en el borde, en la línea vertical, y en otras partes de los elementos que componen la marca)

XX - 000 YY

XX 000 Ejemplo 6

XX – 000 - YY

APÉNDICE 1 Este apéndice se presenta únicamente como referencia y no constituye una parte prescriptiva de la norma.

EJEMPLOS DE MÉTODOS DE ELIMINACIÓN SEGURA DEL EMBALAJE DE MADERA QUE NO CUMPLA CON LA NORMA La eliminación segura del embalaje de madera que no cumpla con los requisitos es una opción de manejo del riesgo que podrá adoptar la ONPF del país importador cuando no se disponga de una medida de emergencia o no sea conveniente adoptarla. Se recomiendan los métodos que figuran abajo para la eliminación segura del embalaje de madera que no cumpla con los requisitos: 1. incineración, si está permitida 2. entierro en profundidad en sitios aprobados por la autoridad pertinente (NB: la profundidad requerida podrá depender de las condiciones climáticas y de la plaga interceptada, pero se recomienda que sea al menos de dos metros. El material debería cubrirse inmediatamente después del entierro y permanecer enterrado. Obsérvese también que el entierro profundo no es una opción de eliminación apropiada para la madera infestada de termitas o de ciertos patógenos de las raíces) 3. procesamiento (NB: el astillado debería utilizarse solamente si se combina con un procesamiento adicional de una manera aprobada por la ONPF del país importador para la eliminación de las plagas en cuestión (por ejemplo, la fabricación de tableros de fibra orientada) 4. otros métodos que estén aprobados por la ONPF como eficaces para las plagas en cuestión 5. devolución al país exportador, si procede. Con el fin de reducir al mínimo el riesgo de introducción o propagación de plagas, los métodos de eliminación segura, de necesitarse, deberían aplicarse con el menor retraso posible.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 5 Rev.

Doc. class.: A

0

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 3 Clim atic c ond iti on for Chihuahua and Los Mochi s warehou se

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 4 International Handling Symbols

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 2 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Designation

Symbol

Explanation

Fragile, Handle with care

The symbol should be applied to easily broken cargoes. Cargoes marked with this symbol should be handled carefully and should never be tipped over or slung.

Use no hooks

Any other kind of point load should also be avoided with cargoes marked with this symbol. The symbol does not automatically prohibit the use of the plate h ooks used for handling bagged cargo.

Top

Keep away from heat (solar radiation)

The package must always be transported, handled and stored in such a way that the arrows always point upwards. Rolling, swinging, severe tipping or tumbling or other such handling must be avoided. The cargo need not, however, be stored "on top". Compliance with the symbol is best achieved if the cargo is kept under the coolest possible conditions. In any event, it must be kept away from additional sources of heat. It may be appropriate to enquire whether prevailing or anticipated temperatures may be harmful. This label should also be used for goods, such as butter and chocolate, which anybody knows should not be exposed to heat, in order to prevent losses.

Protect from heat and radioactive sources

Stowage as for the preceding symbol. The cargo must additionally be protected from radioactivity.

Sling here

The symbol indicates merely where the cargo should be slung, but not the method of lifting. If the symbols are applied equidistant from the middle or center of gravity, th e package will hang level if the slings are of identical length. If this is not the case, the slinging equipment must be shortened on one side.

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 3 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

Designation

Symbol

Explanation

Keep dry

Cargoes bearing this symbol must be protected from excessive humidity and must accordingly be stored under cover. If particularly large or bulky packages cannot be stored in warehouses or sheds, they must be carefully covered with tarpaulins.

Center of gravity

This symbol is intended to provide a clear indication of the position of the center of gravity. To be meaningful, this symbol should only be used where the center of gravity is not central. The meaning is unambiguous if the symbol is applied onto two upright surfaces at right angles to each other.

Clamp here

Stating that the package may be clamped at the indicated point is logically equivalent to a prohibition of clamping anywhere else.

Temperature limitations

According to regulations, the symbol should either be provided with the suffix "...°C" for a specific temperature or, in the case of a temperature range, with an upper ("...°C max.") and lower ("...°C min.") temperature limit. The corresponding temperatures or temperature limits should also be noted on the consignment note.

Do not use forklift truck here

This symbol should only be applied to the sides where the forklift truck cannot be used. Absence of the symbol on other sides of the package amounts to permission to use forklift trucks on these sides.

Do not destroy barrier

A barrier layer which is (virtually) impermeable to water vapor and contains desiccants for corrosion protection is located beneath the outer packaging. This protection will be ineffective if the barrier layer is damaged. Since the symbol has not yet been approved by the ISO, puncturing of the outer shell must in particular be avoided for any packages bearing the words "Packed with desiccants".

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 5 Packing List Form

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Unit: GENERAL

Sh. 2 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Unit: GENERAL

Sh. 3 of 3 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 9 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 6 NOM-11-SCT2/2012 – Norma Oficial Mexicana – Condiciones para el transporte de las substancia y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas

Jueves 5 de julio de 2012

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

SECRETARIA DE COMUNICACIONES Y TRANSPORTES NORMA Oficial Mexicana NOM-011-SCT2/2012, Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas.

Al margen un sello con el Escudo Nacional, que dice: Estados Unidos Mexicanos.- Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes. FELIPE DUARTE OLVERA, Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, con fundamento en los artículos 36 fracciones I, IX y XII de la Ley Orgánica de la Administración Pública Federal; 1o., 38 fracción II, 40 fracciones XVI y XVII, 41, 43, 47 fracción IV y 51 de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 4o. de la Ley Federal de Procedimiento Administrativo; 5o. fracción VI de la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal; 28 y 34 del Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 48 del Reglamento para el Transporte Terrestre de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos; 6o., fracción XIII del Reglamento Interior de la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes; y demás ordenamientos jurídicos que resulten aplicables, y CONSIDERANDO

Que el transporte de substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas deberá realizarse en función de la clase y división de riesgo a la que pertenezca y de la cantidad a transportar. Que como resultado de los trabajos para la implementación del Tratado de Libre Comercio de América del Norte (TLCAN), en el capítulo IX Medidas relativas a normalización, artículo 905 Uso de normas internacionales, se señala que cada una de las partes utilizará como base para sus propias medidas de normalización, las normas internacionales pertinentes o de adopción inminente. En lo que a transporte de materiales peligrosos se refiere, se tomará como fundamento la Regulación Modelo de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas para el Transporte de Substancias Peligrosas u otras normas que las partes acuerden. Que es necesaria la modificación de la Norma Oficial Mexicana, en virtud de que los lineamientos internacionales con los que se encuentra armonizada y sirvieron de base para su elaboración fueron actualizados en el Comité de Expertos en el Transporte de Mercancías Peligrosas de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas. Que la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización en el artículo 51, cuarto párrafo, establece que las normas oficiales mexicanas deberán ser revisadas en forma quinquenal, a efecto de su modificación o cancelación. En este sentido, una vez efectuada la revisión correspondiente, se determinó conveniente la actualización de las especificaciones establecidas en la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-011-SCT2/2003 Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas, con el fin de actualizarla a la 16va. Edición de la Reglamentación Modelo para el Transporte de Mercancías Peligrosas de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas. Que de conformidad con lo establecido en el artículo 47 fracción I de Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, se publicó el 7 de diciembre de 2011 en el Diario Oficial de la Federación el Proyecto de Norma Oficial Mexicana PROY-NOM-011-SCT2/2011, “Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas”, para que en un plazo de 60 días naturales contados a partir de su fecha de publicación, los interesados presentaran comentarios ante el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre. Que durante el plazo señalado los interesados presentaron sus comentarios al Proyecto de Norma Oficial Mexicana de referencia, los cuales fueron motivo de estudio por parte del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, ordenándose la publicación de la respuesta a los mismos en el Diario Oficial de la Federación el 17 de mayo de 2012. Que el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, de conformidad con el inciso d) de la fracción II, del artículo 28 del Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, el cual indica que la clave de la norma debe hacer referencia al a ño en el que ésta es aprobada por el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización correspondiente, tuvo a bien aprobar por unanimidad la actualización de la clave código de la Norma Oficial Mexicana, así como la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-011-SCT2/2012 “Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas”, en su Primera Sesión ordinaria de 2012 celebrada el 2 7 de marzo de 2012. En virtud de lo anterior, he tenido a bien ordenar la publicación de la Norma Oficial Mexicana: NOM-011-SCT2/2012, CONDICIONES PARA EL TRANSPORTE DE LAS SUBSTANCIAS Y MATERIALES PELIGROSOS ENVASADAS Y/O EMBALADAS EN CANTIDADES LIMITADAS

Atentamente México, D.F., a 20 de junio de 2012.- El Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, Felipe Duarte Olvera.- Rúbrica.

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


NORMA OFICIAL MEXICANA NOM-011-SCT2/2012 PARA EL TRANSPORTE TERRESTRE DE SUBSTANCIAS Y MATERIALES PELIGROSOS "CONDICIONES PARA EL TRANSPORTE DE LAS SUBSTANCIAS Y MATERIALES PELIGROSOS ENVASADAS Y/O EMBALADAS EN CANTIDADES LIMITADAS" PREFACIO

En la elaboración de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana participaron: SECRETARIA DE COMUNICACIONES Y TRANSPORTES. DIRECCION GENERAL DE AUTOTRANSPORTE FEDERAL. DIRECCION GENERAL DE TRANSPORTE FERROVIARIO Y MULTIMODAL. INSTITUTO MEXICANO DEL TRANSPORTE. SECRETARIA DE GOBERNACION. DIRECCION GENERAL DE PROTECCION CIVIL. CENTRO NACIONAL DE PREVENCION DE DESASTRES. CENTRO DE INVESTIGACION Y SEGURIDAD NACIONAL (CISEN). SECRETARIA DE SEGURIDAD PUBLICA. POLICIA FEDERAL. SECRETARIA DE MEDIO AMBIENTE Y RECURSOS NATURALES. DIRECCION GENERAL DE GESTION INTEGRAL DE MATERIALES Y ACTIVIDADES RIESGOSAS. DIRECCION GENERAL DE INDUSTRIA. SECRETARIA DE LA DEFENSA NACIONAL. DIRECCION GENERAL DEL REGISTRO FEDERAL DE ARMAS DE FUEGO Y CONTROL DE EXPLOSIVOS. DIRECCION GENERAL DE INDUSTRIA MILITAR. DIRECCION GENERAL DE MATERIALES DE GUERRA. SECRETARIA DE ENERGIA. COMISION NACIONAL DE SEGURIDAD NUCLEAR Y SALVAGUARDIAS. DIRECCION GENERAL DE GAS L.P. SECRETARIA DE SALUD. COMISION FEDERAL PARA LA PROTECCION CONTRA RIESGOS SANITARIOS. UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL AUTONOMA DE MEXICO. FACULTAD DE INGENIERIA, DIVISION DE INGENIERIA CIVIL Y GEOMATICA. FACULTAD DE QUIMICA, COORDINACION DE EDUCACION CONTINUA. INSTITUTO TECNOLOGICO DE TLALNEPANTLA. CAMARA NACIONAL DEL AUTOTRANSPORTE DE CARGA. CONFEDERACION N ACIONAL DE TRANSPORTISTAS MEXICANOS, A.C. CONFEDERACION DE ASOCIACIONES DE AGENTES ADUANALES DE LA REPUBLICA MEXICANA. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE LA INDUSTRIA QUIMICA, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE LA INDUSTRIA FITOSANITARIA, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE FABRICANTES DE PRODUCTOS AROMATICOS, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE FABRICANTES DE PINTURAS Y TINTAS, A.C. ASOCIACION DE TRANSPORTISTAS DE CARGA DE LA ZONA CENTRO DEL ESTADO DE VERACRUZ, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE DISTRIBUIDORES DE GAS LICUADO Y EMPRESAS CONEXAS, A.C. UNION MEXICANA DE FABRICANTES Y FORMULADORES DE AGROQUIMICOS, A.C. SOCIEDAD MEXICANA DE NORMALIZACION Y CERTIFICACION, S.C. NACIONAL DE CARROCERIAS, S.A. DE C.V. GRUPO INTERMEX, S.A. DE C.V. BAYER DE MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. ENVASES Y LAMINADOS, S.A. DE C.V. VISAPLAST, S.A DE C.V. LIDERAZGO AVANZADO EN TRANSPORTACION, S.A. DE C.V. FERROCARRIL MEXICANO, S.A. DE C.V. FERROSUR, S.A. DE C.V. KANSAS CITY SOUTHERN DE MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. GRUPO KUO, S.A. DE C.V.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

INDICE

1.

Objetivo.

2.

Campo de aplicación.

3.

Referencias.

4.

Definiciones.

5.

Especificaciones para e l transporte de substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas.

6.

Bibliografía.

7.

Concordancia con Lineamientos Internacionales.

8.

Observancia.

9.

Vigilancia.

10.

Procedimiento para la Evaluación de la conformidad.

11. Vigencia. 12. Transitorios. 1. Objetivo La presente Norma Oficial Mexicana tiene como objetivo establecer las especificaciones a que deberá sujetarse el transporte de determinadas clases de substancias y materiales peligrosos, envasados y/o embalados en cantidades limitadas. 2. Campo de aplicación Esta Norma Oficial Mexicana es de aplicación obligatoria para los expedidores, transportistas y destinatarios de las substancias y materiales peligrosos, envasados y embalados en cantidades limitadas que transitan por las vías generales de comunicación de j urisdicción federal. Todas las disposiciones previstas en la Reglamentación para el Transporte Terrestre de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos se aplican al transporte de cantidades limitadas, con las excepciones expresamente previstas en esta Norma Oficial Mexicana. 3. Referencias Para la correcta aplicación de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana, es necesario consultar las siguientes Normas Oficiales Mexicanas o las que las sustituyan: NOM-002-SCT/2011

Listado de las transportados.

substancias

y

materiales

peligrosos

más

usualmente

NOM-002/1-SCT/2009

Listado de las substancias y materiales peligrosos más usualmente transportados, instrucciones y uso de envases y embalajes, recipientes intermedios para graneles (RIG’s), grandes envases y embalajes, cisternas portátiles, contenedores de gas de elementos múltiples y contenedores para graneles para el transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos.

NOM-004-SCT/2008

Sistemas de Identificación de Unidades Destinadas al Substancias, Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos

NOM-024-SCT2/2010

Especificaciones para la construcción y reconstrucción, así como los métodos de ensayo (prueba) de los envases y embalajes de las substancias, materiales y residuos peligrosos.

NOM-027-SCT2/2009

Especificaciones especiales y adicionales para los envases, embalajes, recipientes intermedios a granel, cisternas portátiles y transporte de las substancias, materiales y residuos peligrosos de la división 5.2 peróxidos orgánicos.

NOM-043-SCT/2003

Documento de embarque de substancias, materiales y residuos peligrosos.

NOM-008-SCFI/2002

Sistema general de unidades de medida.

Transporte

de

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


4. Definiciones Para los propósitos de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana, se establecen las siguientes definiciones: Cantidad Limitada.- Cantidad máxima aplicable para el envase interior o artículo de ciertas clases, que aparece en la columna 7a. de la tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT/2011, que representa un riesgo menor y puede ser transportada siempre y cuando se cumpla con lo establecido en la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana. Dictamen de Verificación.- Documento que incluye todos los resultados de los exámenes y la determinación de la conformidad efectuada respecto al cumplimiento de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana. El dictamen en cuestión es emitido por una Unidad de Verificación acreditada y aprobada, el cual es reconocido por la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes a través de la Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal, en términos de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. Embalaje.- Material que envuelve, contiene y protege debidamente los productos preenvasados, que facilita y resiste las operaciones de almacenamiento y transporte. Envase.- Cualquier recipiente o envoltura en el cual está contenido el producto para su distribución o venta. Envase y/o embalaje combinados.- Una combinación de envase y/o embalaje para fines de transporte, constituido por uno o varios embalajes y/o envases interiores sujetos dentro de un embalaje y/o envase exterior. Envase y/o embalaje exterior.- Protección exterior de un envase y/o embalaje compuesto o de un envase y/o embalaje combinado, junto con los materiales absorbentes, los materiales de relleno y cualquier otro elemento necesario para contener y proteger los recipientes interiores o los envases y/o embalajes interiores. Envase y/o embalaje interior.- Un envase y/o embalaje que ha de estar provisto de un envase y/o embalaje exterior, para el transporte. Envase y/o embalaje intermedio.- Un envase y/o embalaje situado entre los envases y/o embalajes interiores o los objetos y un envase y/o embalaje exterior. Evaluación de la Conformidad.- La determinación del grado de cumplimiento con las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas u otras especificaciones, prescripciones o características. Comprende, entre otros, los procedimientos de muestreo, prueba, calibración, certificación y verificación. Grupos de Envases y Embalajes.- Los envases y embalajes que contengan substancias peligrosas de todas las clases o sus remanentes, excepto las clases de riesgo 1 y 2 y las divisiones 5.2 y 6.2, se clasifican en los siguientes grupos: Grupo I.- Para substancias muy peligrosas. Grupo II.- Para substancias medianamente peligrosas. Grupo III.- Para substancias poco peligrosas. Los cuales son referenciados en la columna 5 de la Tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT/2011 “Listado de las substancias y materiales peligrosos más usualmente transportados”, en adelante NOM-002-SCT. Ley.- Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. Secretaría.- Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes. Sobreembalaje.- Un recipiente utilizado por un mi smo expedidor para contener uno o más bultos y formar una unidad para mayor comodidad de manipulación y almacenamiento durante el transporte. Unidad de Verificación.- La persona moral que realiza actos de verificación. Verificación.- La constatación ocular o comprobación mediante muestreo, medición, pruebas de laboratorio o examen de documentos que se realiza para evaluar la conformidad en un momento determinado. 5. Especificaciones para el transporte de substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas 5.1 El límite cuantitativo para el envase y/o embalaje interior se especifica para cada substancia en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NO M-002-SCT. 5.2. La cifra “0” en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT, indica que no está permitido el transporte del material o substancia correspondiente conforme a esta Norma Oficial Mexicana.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

5.3 Los envases interiores que contienen substancias y materiales peligrosos deben tener cantidades iguales o menores a las listadas en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT. La cifra “0” en dicha columna significa que no son aplicables las especificaciones de la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana a la substancia de que se trate. 5.4. Las substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas deben transportarse solamente en envases y/o embalajes interiores colocados en adecuados embalajes exteriores. Podrán utilizarse envases y/o embalajes intermedios. No obstante, el empleo de envases interiores no es necesario para el transporte de objetos tales como los aerosoles o los recipientes pequeños que contienen gas. 5.5 Los embalajes se ajustarán a las especificaciones de los numerales 5.2, 5.2.1, 5.3 y 5.5 a 5.9 de la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-024-SCT2/2010 “Especificaciones para la construcción y reconstrucción, así como los métodos de ensayo (prueba) de los envases y embalajes de las substancias, materiales y residuos peligrosos”, y se diseñarán de manera que satisfagan las especificaciones de construcción indicadas en el numeral 6 de la NOM-024-SCT2/2010.La masa bruta total del embalaje no debe exceder de 30 kg. 5.6. Todos los envases y embalajes que contengan substancias y materiales peligrosos, deben contar con etiquetas de identificación de la clase de riesgo cuando rebasen el límite cuantitativo máximo especificado en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT. 5.7. Las bandejas que están provistas de ligaduras contráctiles o elásticas (flejes) y se ajustan a lo previsto en los numerales 5.2, 5.2.1, 5.3 y 5.5 a 5.9 de la NOM-024-SCT2/2010, son aceptables como envases y/o embalajes exteriores para artículos o como envases interiores que contienen substancias o materiales peligrosos cuyo transporte se efectúe de conformidad con esta Norma Oficial Mexicana. Los envases y/o embalajes interiores susceptibles de romperse o ser fácilmente perforados, tales como los de vidrio, porcelana, gres o ciertos plásticos, se colocarán en envases y/o embalajes intermedios adecuados que cumplan con las especificaciones de los numerales 5.2, 5.2.1, 5.3 y 5.5 a 5.9 de la NOM-024-SCT2/2010 y se diseñarán de manera que satisfagan los requisitos de construcción indicados en el numeral 6 de la NOM-024SCT2/2010. La masa bruta total de cada embalaje no deberá exceder los 20 kg. 5.8 Las substancias y materiales peligrosos líquidos de la clase 8 (corrosivos), del grupo de envase y/o embalaje II colocados o contenidos en envases interiores de vidrio, porcelana o gres, deben colocarse en un embalaje intermedio compatible y rígido. 5.9 Para el transporte pueden colocarse envases con substancias y materiales peligrosos de distintas clases de riesgo en cantidades limitadas en un mismo embalaje exterior, siempre y cuando sean compatibles y no se produzca entre ellas una interacción peligrosa en caso de derrame. 5.10 No es necesario aplicar especificaciones sobre segregación a las substancias peligrosas envasadas y/o embaladas en cantidades limitadas en un vehículo o contenedor. 5.11 No será necesario que los envases y/o embalajes que contengan substancias o materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas, lleven la Designación Oficial de Transporte ni el número de identificación UN de su contenido (Naciones Unidas, por sus siglas en inglés), pero deberán llevar la marca que aparece en la Figura No. 1. La marca debe ser claramente visible, legible y debe ser capaz de resistir (soportar) la exposición a la intemperie sin degradación alguna. Figura No. 1 Marca para los envases y/o embalajes que contengan cantidades limitadas.

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


Las partes superior e inferior y la línea que delimita el rombo deben ser de color negro y la parte central debe ser de color blanco o de un color que ofrezca un contraste adecuado. Las dimensiones mínimas deben ser de: 100 mm x 100 mm. El grosor mínimo de la línea que delimita el rombo: 2 mm. Si el tamaño del envase y/o embalaje no permite alojar la marca con esas dimensiones, podrán reducirse hasta un mínimo de 50 mm x 50 mm, siempre que ésta se siga viendo claramente. 5.12 Cuando se transporten substancias o materiales peligrosos envasados y/o embalados en cantidades limitadas, es necesario aplicar las especificaciones relativas al Documento de Embarque a que se refiere la NOM-043-SCT/2003 “Documento de embarque de substancias, materiales y residuos peligrosos”. En el Documento de Embarque se incluirá en la descripción del envío las palabras “cantidad limitada” o la abreviatura “CANT. LTDA”. 5.13 Cuando los embalajes que contengan substancias o materiales peligrosos se coloquen en un sobreembalaje, éste deberá llevar la inscripción “SOBREEMBALAJE”, así como las marcas que establece el presente Proyecto de Norma Oficial Mexicana, salvo que estén visibles las marcas representativas de todas las substancias peligrosas contenidas en el sobreembalaje. 5.14 Las unidades que transporten substancias y materiales peligrosos en envases y/o embalajes bajo el concepto de Cantidades Limitadas (CANT. LTDA.), probados conforme a lo requerido en la NOM-024SCT2/2010, no requieren portar carteles de identificación de clase de riesgo, a menos que superen los 454 kg en total de la carga por unidad vehicular; en este caso deben portar los carteles que representen el mayor riesgo de acuerdo al punto 6.1.5 de la NOM-004-SCT/2008 “Sistemas de Identificación de Unidades Destinadas al Transporte de Substancias, Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos”. 6. Bibliografía 



Regulación Modelo para el Transporte de Mercancías Peligrosas de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas, Capítulo 3.4 (Recommendations on The Transport of Dangerous Goods), sixteenth revised edition, United Nations, New York y Ginebra, 2009. Acuerdo Europeo para el Transporte Internacional de Materiales Peligrosos por Carretera (ADR, por sus siglas en inglés), emitido por la Comisión Económica para Europa de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas, Nueva York y Ginebra, 2008 (European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road).



Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización.



Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización.

7. Concordancia con Lineamientos Internacionales Esta Norma Oficial Mexicana es equivalente con: 



Regulación Modelo para el Transporte de Mercancías Peligrosas de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas, Capítulo 3.4 (Recommendations on The Transport of Dangerous Goods), sixteenth revised edition, United Nations, New York y Ginebra, 2009. Acuerdo Europeo para el Transporte Internacional de Materiales Peligrosos por Carretera (ADR por sus siglas en inglés) Capítulo 3.4 emitido por la Comisión Económica para Europa de la Organización de las Naciones Unidas, Nueva York y Ginebra, 2008 (European Agreement Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road).

8. Observancia Esta Norma Oficial Mexicana es de observancia obligatoria en las Vías Generales de Comunicación para el Transporte de Substancias y Materiales Peligrosos, con fundamento en lo dispuesto en la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal, así como en el Reglamento para el Transporte Terrestre de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos. 9. Vigilancia La Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes a través de la Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, por conducto de la Policía Federal, se coordinarán en la vigilancia del cumplimiento de la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana, en el ámbito de sus respectivas competencias.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

10. Procedimiento para la evaluación de la conformidad 10.1 La verificación del cumplimiento de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana se realizará a través de revisión documental y constatación ocular. Se verificará que no se transporten como Cantidades Limitadas substancias o materiales peligrosos señalados con la cifra “0” en la Tabla 2, columna 7a. de la NOM-002-SCT, así como que no rebasen los límites cuantitativos precisados de acuerdo al grupo de envases interiores, y la masa bruta total de envase y cada embalaje no rebase los 20 kg, cuando se refiera a envases fijados con ligaduras contráctiles (flejes) y de 30 kg cuando éstos no estén fijados con ligaduras contráctiles (flejes). De las Secretarías de Comunicaciones y Transportes y de Seguridad Pública 10.2 Para el caso del transporte carretero, la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, en el ámbito de sus respectivas competencias, se coordinarán en la vigilancia, verificación e inspección de los servicios de autotransporte federal y transporte privado. 10.3 La Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes podrá realizar visitas de inspección, a través de los servidores públicos comisionados que exhiban identificación vigente y orden de visita, en la que se especifiquen las disposiciones cuyo cumplimiento habrá de inspeccionarse. 10.4 La verificación se aplicará a las unidades vehiculares de autotransporte a que se refiere la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana, que transiten en los caminos y puentes de jurisdicción federal, previendo que no se originen congestionamientos de tránsito sobre la vía de circulación. 10.4.1 Los servidores públicos comisionados que exhiban identificación vigente y orden de visita, deberán constatar ocularmente y con base al Documento de embarque de las substancias o materiales peligrosos envasados y embalados en cantidades limitadas, que correspondan a la clase o división de riesgo establecidas en la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana y que se establezcan las condiciones para su transporte como Cantidades Limitadas. 10.4.2 Asimismo se verificará que los envases y embalajes, ya sean individuales o integrados en paquetes, no excedan el límite cuantitativo máximo autorizado para su transporte como Cantidades Limitadas, de acuerdo a su clase o división de riesgo y en función de su grupo de envase y embalaje precisadas en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NOM-002-SCT, así como también que los embalajes porten la marca correspondiente a Cantidades Limitadas de acuerdo a la Figura No. 1 de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana. De las Unidades de Verificación 10.5 La Evaluación de la Conformidad en planta y en las instalaciones de carga del transportista, podrá ser efectuada por Unidades de Verificación debidamente acreditadas y aprobadas, las cuales emitirán un Dictamen de Verificación en el que harán constar los resultados obtenidos en dicha verificación. Para la acreditación y aprobación de las instancias interesadas en evaluar la conformidad de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana, se estará a lo dispuesto en la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. 10.6 Para el efecto, las Unidades de Verificación deberán constatar ocularmente y con base al Documento de embarque de las substancias o materiales peligrosos envasados y embalados en cantidades limitadas, que correspondan a la clase o división de riesgo establecidas en la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana y que se establezcan las condiciones para su transporte como Cantidades Limitadas. 10.7 Asimismo, se verificará que los envases y embalajes, ya sean individuales o integrados en paquetes, no excedan el límite cuantitativo máximo autorizado para su transporte como Cantidades Limitadas, de acuerdo a su clase o división de riesgo, y en función de su grupo de envase y embalaje precisadas en la columna 7a. de la Tabla 2 de la NO M-002-SCT. 10.7.1 Los envases y embalajes deberán portar la marca correspondiente a Cantidades Limitadas de acuerdo a la Figura No. 1 de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana. 10.8 De igual forma, se constatará ocularmente que los envases y embalajes no presenten indicios de fractura o malformación, así como exentos de fugas o vertidos de las substancias y materiales peligrosos. Tratándose de envases y embalajes construidos de materiales frágiles como los de vidrio, porcelana, gres o ciertos plásticos, deberán estar asegurados dentro de un envase y embalaje exterior. 10.9 Cuando derivado de la constatación ocular y documental exista discrepancia o incongruencia con relación a la clase o división de riesgo de las substancias o materiales peligrosos o bien, en el límite cuantitativo máximo permitido para su transporte como Cantidad Limitada de acuerdo a esta Norma Oficial Mexicana, las Unidades de Verificación podrán requerir a los solicitantes de la evaluación de la conformidad, presenten Dictamen emitido por un Laboratorio de Pruebas en el cual se determine fehacientemente la clase o división de riesgo de las substancias y materiales peligrosos o bien, la capacidad de los envases y embalajes utilizados, según sea el caso.

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


10.10 En aquellos casos en los que del resultado de la verificación se determinen condiciones diferentes a lo establecido en esta Norma Oficial Mexicana, la Unidad de Verificación dará aviso al expedidor y, en su caso, al transportista de que su embarque no se considera como una Cantidad Limitada. Asimismo, notificará a la Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal el resultado de la misma. 10.11 Las Unidades de Verificación interesadas en evaluar la conformidad de la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana deberán contar con la a creditación de la Entidad Mexicana de Acreditación, A.C., autorizada para tal efecto y con la aprobación de la Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal. 11. Vigencia La presente Norma Oficial Mexicana entrará en vigor a los 60 días naturales siguientes de su publicación en el Diario Oficial de la Federación. 12. Transitorios PRIMERO.- Con la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma Oficial Mexicana se cancela la NOM-011SCT2/2003, Condiciones para el transporte de las substancias y materiales peligrosos en cantidades limitadas, publicada en el Diario Oficial de la Federación el 8 de diciembre de 2003. SEGUNDO.- Las especificaciones establecidas en el numeral 5.11 serán obligatorias y entrarán en vigor a partir del 1 de enero de 2014, hasta en tanto, los envases y embalajes que contengan mercancías peligrosas en cantidades limitadas, deberán marcarse con el número UN del contenido (precedido de las letras UN) situadas dentro de un rombo. La anchura de la línea que delimite el rombo será como mínimo de 2 mm; el número deberá tener una altura mínima de 6 mm. Cuando en el envase o embalaje haya más de una substancia asignada a distintos números UN, el rombo deberá ser suficientemente grande como para que en él puedan caber todos los números UN necesarios. ______________________________

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 4 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 7 Over-size / overweight cargo drawing sample

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Unit: GENERAL

Sh. 2 of 4 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Unit: GENERAL

Sh. 3 of 4 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Unit: GENERAL

Sh. 4 of 4 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 37 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 8 NOM-012-SCT-2-2008 – Norma Oficial Mexicana – Sobre el peso y dimension màxima con los que pueden circular los vehìculos de autotransporte que transitan en las vìas generales de comunicacìon de jurisdicciòn federal

Martes 1 de abril de 2008

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

1

SECRETARIA DE COMUNICACIONES Y TRANSPORTES NORMA Oficial Mexicana NOM-012-SCT-2-2008, Sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en l as vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal.

Al margen un sello con el Escudo Nacional, que dice: Estados Unidos Mexicanos.- Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes.- Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal. MANUEL RODRIGUEZ ARREGUI, Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, con fundamento en los artículos 36 fracciones I y XII de la Ley Orgánica de la Administración Pública Federal; 1o., 3o., fracción Xl, 38 fracción II; 40 fracciones III y XVI; 41, 43 y 47 fracciones I, II, III y IV de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 28 y 34 del Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 1o. y 5o. fracciones IV y VI, 39, 60, 70 y 70 Bis de la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal; 41 del Reglamento de Autotransporte Federal y Servicios Auxiliares; 4o. de la Ley Federal de Procedimiento Administrativo; 6o. fracción XIII del Reglamento Interior de la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes; 1o., 3o., 4o., 5o. y 6o. del Reglamento sobre el Peso y Dimensiones y Capacidad de los Vehículos de Autotransporte que transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal, y CONSIDERANDO

Que la fracción XVI del artículo 40 de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización dispone que las normas oficiales mexicanas tendrán como finalidad establecer las características y especificaciones que deben reunir los vehículos de transporte para proteger las vías generales de comunicación y la seguridad de sus usuarios. Que la fracción VI del artículo 5o. de la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal, faculta a la Secretaría a expedir las normas oficiales mexicanas de vehículos de autotransporte y sus servicios auxiliares. Que el pasado 18 de marzo de 2003, el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre aprobó el proyecto de norma oficial mexicana PROY-NOM-012-SCT-2-2003. Que en cumplimiento del artículo 47 fracción I de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, el pasado 28 de noviembre de 2006 dicho proyecto de norma oficial mexicana fue publicado en el Diario Oficial de la Federación a efecto de que dentro de los siguientes 60 días naturales los interesados presentaran sus comentarios al Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre. Que durante el plazo señalado, los interesados presentaron sus comentarios al proyecto de norma, los cuales fueron estudiados por el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre con la intervención de instituciones educativas y de investigación del país, representantes de la industria nacional, así como la intervención de las autoridades involucradas, integrándose a dicho proyecto de norma las modificaciones que el citado Comité consideró procedentes. Que en cumplimiento a lo dispuesto por el artículo 47 fracción III de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización y conforme a los acuerdos adoptados por el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, el 30 de marzo de 2007 fueron publicadas en el Diario Oficial de la Federación, las respuestas a los comentarios recibidos en relación al proyecto de norma oficial mexicana en cita. Que conforme al inciso d) de la fracción II del artículo 28 del Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, la clave de la norma debe hacer referencia al año en el que ésta es aprobada por el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización correspondiente. Que en sesión extraordinaria celebrada el pasado 25 de marzo de 2008, conforme a los acuerdos adoptados y en razón de que su contenido normativo inicial no varió substancialmente, el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, aprobó la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-012-SCT-2-2008, Sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal, por lo que aprobó se procediera a su expedición. Que el artículo 6o., fracción XIII del Reglamento Interior de la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes faculta al Subsecretario de Transporte a expedir normas oficiales mexicanas en el ámbito de su competencia, por lo que tengo a bien expedir la siguiente: Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-012-SCT-2-2008, Sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal. México, D.F., a los veintisiete días del mes de marzo de dos mil ocho.- El Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, Manuel Rodríguez Arregui.- Rúbrica.

2

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


NORMA OFICIAL MEXICANA NOM-012-SCT-2-2008, SOBRE EL PESO Y DIMENSIONES MAXIMAS CON LOS QUE PUEDEN CIRCULAR LOS VEHICULOS DE AUTOTRANSPORTE QUE TRANSITAN EN LAS VIAS GENERALES DE COMUNICACION DE JURISDICCION FEDERAL PREFACIO

En la elaboración de esta Norma Oficial Mexicana participaron: SECRETARIA DE COMUNICACIONES Y TRANSPORTES SUBSECRETARIA DE T RANSPORTE SUBSECRETARIA DE INFRAESTRUCTURA COORDINACION GENERAL DE PLANEACION Y CENTROS SCT UNIDAD DE ASUNTOS JURIDICOS DIRECCION GENERAL DE AUTOTRANSPORTE FEDERAL DIRECCION GENERAL DE CONSERVACION DE CARRETERAS DIRECCION GENERAL DE SERVICIOS TECNICOS INSTITUTO MEXICANO DEL TRANSPORTE SECRETARIA DE GOBERNACION COORDINACION GENERAL DE PROTECCION CIVIL DIRECCION GENERAL DE PROTECCION CIVIL SECRETARIA DE ECONOMIA DIRECCION GENERAL DE NORMAS SECRETARIA DE HACIENDA Y CREDITO PUBLICO SERVICIO DE ADMINISTRACION TRIBUTARIA ADMINISTRACION GENERAL DE ADUANAS SECRETARIA DE ENERGIA COMISION NACIONAL DE SEGURIDAD NUCLEAR Y SALVAGUARDAS SECRETARIA DE SALUD COMISION FEDERAL PARA LA PROTECCION CONTRA RIESGOS SANITARIOS COMISION DE EVIDENCIA Y MANEJO DE RIESGOS SECRETARIA DE LA DEFENSA NACIONAL DIRECCION GENERAL DEL REGISTRO FEDERAL DE ARMAS DE FUEGO Y CONTROL DE EXPLOSIVOS SECRETARIA DE SEGURIDAD PUBLICA POLICIA FEDERAL SECRETARIA DE TRABAJO Y PREVISION SOCIAL DIRECCION GENERAL DE SEGURIDAD Y SALUD EN EL TRABAJO SECRETARIA DE AGRICULTURA, GANADERIA, DESARROLLO RURAL, PESCA Y ALIMENTACION DIRECCION GENERAL DE SANIDAD VEGETAL SECRETARIA DE MEDIO AMBIENTE Y RECURSOS NATURALES DIRECCION GENERAL DE FOMENTO AMBIENTAL, URBANO Y TURISTICO DIRECCION GENERAL DE GESTION INTEGRAL DE MATERIALES Y ACTIVIDADES RIESGOSAS SECRETARIA DE RELACIONES EXTERIORES UNIDAD DE RELACIONES ECONOMICAS Y COOPERACION INTERNACIONAL SECRETARIA DE TURISMO DIRECCION GENERAL DE MEJORA REGULATORIA PROCURADURIA FEDERAL AL CONSUMIDOR PETROLEOS MEXICANOS COMISION FEDERAL DE ELECTRICIDAD COMISION FEDERAL DE COMPETENCIA GOBIERNO DEL DISTRITO FEDERAL SECRETARIA DE TRANSPORTE Y VIALIDAD UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL AUTONOMA DE MEXICO INSTITUTO DE INGENIERIA


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

INSTITUTO POLITECNICO NACIONAL CENTRO DE INVESTIGACION E INNOVACION TECNOLOGICA UNIDAD PROFESIONAL INTERDISCIPLINARIA DE INGENIERIA Y CIENCIAS SOCIALES Y ADMINISTRATIVAS CONSEJO NACIONAL DE CIENCIA Y TECNOLOGIA CONFEDERACION DE CAMARAS INDUSTRIALES CAMARA NACIONAL DE LA INDUSTRIA DE LA TRANSFORMACION CAMARA NACIONAL DE LA INDUSTRIA HULERA CAMARA NACIONAL DEL AUTOTRANSPORTE DE CARGA CAMARA NACIONAL DEL AUTOTRANSPORTE DE PASAJE Y TURISMO CONFEDERACION N ACIONAL DE TRANSPORTISTAS MEXICANOS, A.C. CAMARA NACIONAL DE LA INDUSTRIA MOLINERA DEL TRIGO ASOCIACION DE TRANSPORTISTAS AL SERVICIO DE PEMEX, CLIENTES Y EMPRESAS SUSTITUTAS, A.C. ASOCIACION DE TRANSPORTISTAS DE CARGA DE LA ZONA CENTRO DEL ESTADO DE VERACRUZ, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE INGENIERIA DE VIAS TERRESTRES, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE LA INDUSTRIA AUTOMOTRIZ, A. C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE LA INDUSTRIA SALINERA, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE TRANSPORTISTAS, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE LA INDUSTRIA QUIMICA, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE PRODUCTORES DE AUTOBUSES, CAMIONES Y TRACTOCAMIONES, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE TRANSPORTE PRIVADO, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE EMPRESAS FERROCARRILERAS, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE FABRICANTES DE PINTURAS Y TINTAS, A.C. ASOCIACION MEXICANA DE EMPRESAS DE PRUEBAS NO DESTRUCTIVAS, A.C. ASOCIACION NACIONAL DE FABRICANTES DE DOCUMENTOS OFICIALES, A.C. INDUSTRIA NACIONAL DE AUTOPARTES, A.C. CONSEJO NACIONAL PARA EL ABASTO DE GRANOS Y OLE AGINOSAS GRUPO INTERMEX LICONSA, S.A. DE C.V. INDUSTRIAS ALTON INDUSTRIAS MICHELIN, S.A. DE C.V.

INDICE

1.-

Fundamentación y motivación

2.-

Objetivo y campo de aplicación

3.- Referencias 4.- Definiciones 5.-

Clasificación de vehículos 5.1. Atendiendo a su clase. 5.2. Atendiendo a su clase, nomenclatura, número de ejes y llantas.

6.- Especificaciones 6.1. De peso. 6.1.1. Peso máximo por eje. 6.1.2. Peso bruto vehicular máximo autorizado.

3

4

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


6.2. Dimensiones. 6.2.1. Dimensiones máximas autorizadas. 6.3 Tecnologías alternativas. 6.4 Casos de conectividad. 6.4.1 Vehículos de Carga 6.4.2 Vehículos de Pasajeros 7.-

Observancia obligatoria de esta Norma 7.1 Vehículos de fabricación nacional y de importación.

8.- Sanciones 9.- Vigilancia 10.- Procedimiento de Evaluación de la Conformidad (PEC) 10.1 Objetivo 10.2 Unidades de Medida 10.3 Disposiciones Generales del PEC 10.4 Verificación 10.5 Unidades de Verificación 10.6 Dependencias y Organismos que intervienen en la verificación 11.- Métodos de Prueba 12.- Concordancia con normas internacionales 13.- Transitorios 14.- Bibliografía 15.- Apéndice Normativo “PESO Y DIMENSIONES M AXIMAS AUTORIZADAS POR TIPO DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO”: Tabla A

Peso máximo autorizado (t), por tipo de eje y camino.

Tabla B

Peso bruto vehicular máximo autorizado (t), por tipo de vehículo y camino.

Tabla C

Largo máximo autorizado (m), por tipo de vehículo y camino.

16.- Anexo 1, Tramos carreteros a que se refiere el numeral 6.4.1.1, inciso c) de casos de conectividad 1. Fundamentación y motivación Con fundamento en los artículos 36 fracciones I y XII de la Ley Orgánica de la Administración Pública Federal; 3o., fracción XI, 38 fracción II; 40 fracciones III y XVI; 43 y 47 fracciones I, II, III y IV de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 28 y 34 del Reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización; 1o. y 5o. fracciones IV y VI, 39, 60, 70 y 70 Bis de la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal; 41 del Reglamento de Autotransporte Federal y Servicios Auxiliares; 6o. fracción XIII del Reglamento Interior de la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes; 1o., 3o., 4o., 5o. y 6o. del Reglamento sobre el Peso y Dimensiones y Capacidad de los Vehículos de Autotransporte que transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal, y CONSIDERANDO

Que para mejorar los niveles de seguridad tanto en la vida como en los bienes de las personas que utilizan los caminos y carreteras de jurisdicción federal, así como disminuir los daños a la infraestructura del país, es necesario establecer las características y especificaciones en cuanto al límite máximo de pe so y dimensiones que deben observar los vehículos de autotransporte que circulan por los caminos y puentes que forman parte de las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal, de acuerdo con las características físicas y especificaciones técnicas de la infraestructura carretera nacional. Que la regulación del peso y dimensiones de los vehículos que transitan por las carreteras y puentes de jurisdicción federal comprende la atención de diversos temas como son: los riesgos a que son expuestas las personas que las utilizan; el daño a pavimentos y puentes; problemas de tránsito, así como el uso eficiente de la infraestructura y del transporte.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

5

Que además se requieren esfuerzos importantes para incrementar la competitividad del autotransporte en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal mediante la adopción de medidas concertadas con los diferentes actores, destacando, entre otros, el desarrollo de la infraestructura, la seguridad, la modernización del parque vehicular, la capacitación a operadores, la inspección y vigilancia, tráfico seguro, condiciones físico mecánicas, corresponsabilidad de los usuarios y prestadores del servicio. Que actualmente la red de carreteras federales presenta un ritmo de deterioro en pavimentos y puentes superior a los recursos que se destinan en el presupuesto para su mantenimiento. Además de que cada tipo de carretera está diseñada para diferentes volúmenes de tráfico. En el pasado las prioridades presupuestales estuvieron dirigidas a privilegiar la construcción de nueva infraestructura más que a mejorar la existente. Que a pesar de los esfuerzos para aumentar las medidas de seguridad en la operación del transporte en carreteras mediante la colaboración de las diversas autoridades involucradas y el sector privado, se requieren medidas adicionales que contribuyan a incrementar la seguridad en el tránsito de personas y mercancías, así como disminuir los riesgos a los que son expuestas con el tránsito de vehículos que, por la carga que transportan y sus dimensiones, implican en sí mismos un riesgo para la seguridad tanto de los usuarios como de la infraestructura. Que la infraestructura carretera en el país presenta rezagos importantes frente a la de nuestros principales socios comerciales, y que dadas sus características físicas y de diseño que son coincidentes con los estándares internacionales, el recorrido de vehículos demasiado pesados supone cargas y esfuerzos extraordinarios que acelera su deterioro y reduce su vida útil, por lo que resulta imperativo establecer una regulación adecuada. Que la circulación de vehículos que exceden los límites de peso y dimensiones autorizados al generar un mayor consumo de combustible debido al mayor peso y congestionamiento de tránsito que provocan, contribuyen a incrementar la problemática de polución ambiental y del cambio climático en el país. Que es importante tomar las medidas necesarias para garantizar la seguridad de los usuarios con el objeto de disminuir los índices de accidentes. Que para atender lo anterior, es necesario que el parque vehicular del autotransporte incorpore vehículos con tecnologías más avanzadas que actualmente se encuentran disponibles en México, que además de mejorar la seguridad, permiten una oferta del servicio más competitiva. Que el Gobierno Federal tiene el interés y la convicción de resolver la problemática descrita de manera integral para mejorar los niveles de seguridad de los usuarios de las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal, así como promover la conservación de la infraestructura carretera del país y la productividad de la industria y el comercio. Que actualmente la vida útil de los puentes existentes en la red carretera federal, se ha reducido en relación al periodo de uso para el que fueron diseñados, por lo que para mantener sus niveles de seguridad y operatividad, se requieren inversiones significativas. Que adicionalmente el país requiere inversiones en obras puntuales que permitan mejorar la operatividad de la red carretera, tales como modificaciones de curvas, corrección de pendientes, recuperación de acotamientos, construcción de terceros carriles para rebase, ampliaciones de corona y mejoramiento del señalamiento; además, la circulación en tramos saturados afecta negativamente el tránsito de los vehículos, incrementa los tiempos de recorrido, genera costos adicionales en el transporte e impacta negativamente en la fatalidad y siniestralidad de los accidentes. Que la Secretaría tiene encomendada la tarea de definir las políticas y promover la regulación que coadyuven al desarrollo seguro y eficiente del transporte y la infraestructura en el país, así como su sano crecimiento en el largo plazo, para lo cual se requiere establecer normas claras que definan las características y especificaciones que deben reunir los vehículos de autotransporte federal, así como los equipos y los servicios conexos que tiendan a proteger la seguridad de los usuarios y el uso eficiente de las vías generales de comunicación. Que una rigurosa supervisión del peso y dimensiones de los vehículos de autotransporte federal permitirá reducir el daño a las carreteras y puentes e impactará favorablemente en los costos de operación de los camiones y autobuses al contar con mejores superficies de rodad ura.

6

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


Que la adecuada determinación del peso y dimensiones de los vehículos que transitan por carreteras y puentes federales se ha venido posponiendo, lo que ha afectado considerablemente tanto a la infraestructura como a la inversión en equipo, principalmente en la renovación de los vehículos de arrastre. Que la fracción XVI del artículo 40 de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, dispone que las normas oficiales mexicanas tendrán como finalidad establecer las características y especificaciones que deben reunir los vehículos de transporte para proteger las vías generales de comunicación y la seguridad de sus usuarios. Que la fracción VI del artículo 5o. de la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal, faculta a la Secretaría a expedir las normas oficiales mexicanas de vehículos de autotransporte y sus servicios auxiliares. Que el Reglamento Interior de la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes en su artículo 6o. fracción XIII, faculta al Subsecretario de Transporte a expedir normas oficiales mexicanas y difundir normas mexicanas en el ámbito de su competencia. Que el proyecto de Norma Oficial Mexicana PROY-NOM-012-SCT-2-2003 fue aprobado en el seno del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre en su sesión ordinaria celebrada el 18 de marzo de 2003. Que el proyecto de Norma Oficial Mexicana PROY-NOM-012-SCT-2-2003, fue publicado en el Diario Oficial de la Federación el 28 de noviembre de 2006, para consulta pública durante el plazo de 60 días naturales, conforme al artículo 47 fracción I de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. Que en el plazo antes señalado, los interesados presentaron sus comentarios al proyecto de la Norma, los cuales fueron estudiados y revisados en el seno del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre con la intervención de las principales instituciones educativas y de investigación en el país, así como los representantes más significativos de la industria y con la intervención de las autoridades involucradas, integrándose al proyecto definitivo las modificaciones que dicho Comité consideró procedentes. Que la Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes, con fundamento en el artículo 47 fracción III de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización por conducto del Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, Lic. Manuel Rodríguez Arregui, ordenó la publicación en el Diario Oficial de la Federación de las respuestas a los comentarios recibidos en el proceso de consulta pública. Que en cumplimiento de lo dispuesto en la fracción IV del artículo 47 de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, el Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, en reunión extraordinaria celebrada el 25 de marzo de 2008, aprobó el texto definitivo de la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-012-SCT-2-2008, Sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal, para su publicación en el Diario Oficial de la Federación. 2.- Objetivo y campo de aplicación La presente Norma Oficial Mexicana tiene por objeto establecer las especificaciones de peso, dimensiones y capacidad de los vehículos de autotransporte federal, sus servicios auxiliares y transporte privado que transitan en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal, excepto los vehículos tipo grúa de arrastre y arrastre y salvamento. 3.- Referencias Para la correcta aplicación de esta Norma, es necesario consultar: Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-008-SCFI-2002, Sistema General de Unidades de Medida. Vigente. Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-067-SCT-2/SECOFI-1999, Transporte terrestre-Servicio de autotransporte económico y mixto-midibús-características y especificaciones técnicas y de seguridad. Vigente. Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-010-SCFI-1994, Instrumentos de medición-Instrumentos para pesar de funcionamiento no automático-Requisitos técnicos y metrológicos. Vigente.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

7

4.- Definiciones Autobús.-

Vehículo automotor de seis o más llantas, de estructura integral o convencional con capacidad de más de 30 personas.

Autotanque.-

Vehículo cerrado, camión tanque, semirremolque o remolque tipo tanque, destinado al transporte de líquidos, gases licuados o sólidos en suspensión.

Bitácora de horas de servicio del conductor.-

Registro diario que contiene los datos necesarios para conocer el tiempo efectivo de conducción y determinar el de descanso.

Cadena de seguridad.-

Dispositivo de seguridad, cadena o cable de acero, para mantener la conexión entre los vehículos acoplados o enganchados, ya sean motrices o de arrastre y mantener el control de dirección de viaje del vehículo trasero trasero en caso de falla de la argolla argolla y/o gancho de arrastre.

Camión unitario.-

Vehículo automotor de seis o más llantas, destinado al transporte de carga con peso bruto vehicular mayor a 4 t.

Camión remolque.-

Vehículo destinado al transporte de carga, constituido por un camión unitario con un remolque, acoplado mediante un convertidor.

Capacidad.-

Número máximo de personas, más peso del equipaje y paquetería, que un vehículo destinado al servicio de pasajeros puede transportar y para el cual fue diseñado por el fabricante o reconstructor.

Carga útil y peso útil.-

Peso máximo de la carga que un vehículo puede transportar en condiciones de seguridad y para el cual fue diseñado por el fabricante o reconstructor.

Carta de porte.-

Título legal del contrato entre el remitente y la empresa de autotransporte, y por su contenido se decidirán las cuestiones que se susciten con motivo del transporte de las cosas; contendrá las menciones que exige el código de la materia y surtirá los efectos que en él se determinan.

Condiciones de operación del vehículo.-

Cuando el vehículo se encuentra con combustible, lubricantes, sistemas de enfriamiento y accesorios a nivel.

Convertidor.-

Sistema de acoplamiento que se engancha a un semirremolque y que le agrega una articulación a los vehículos de tractocamión semirremolque-remolque y camión remolque.

Convertidor tipo “H”.“H”.-

Sistema de acoplamiento de dos o más ojillos que se engancha a un camión o a un semirremolque y que le agrega una articulación a las configuraciones compuestas por un tractocamión, semirremolque y remolque o camión remolque.

Dimensiones.-

Alto, ancho y largo máximo expresado en metros de un vehículo en condiciones de operación incluyendo la carga.

Frenos Libres de Fricción (freno auxiliar).-

Sistema de frenos independientes al sistema de frenos de servicio y que actúan directamente en el tren motriz.

Norma.-

Norma Oficial Mexicana.

Peso.-

Fuerza que ejerce sobre el piso un vehículo debido a su masa y a la gravedad terrestre.

Peso bruto vehicular.-

Suma del peso vehicular y el peso de la carga, en el caso de vehículos de carga; o suma del peso vehicular y el peso de los pasajeros, equipaje y paquetería, en el caso de los vehículos destinados al servicio de pasajeros.

8

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


Peso por eje.-

Concentración de peso que un eje transmite a través de todas sus llantas a la superficie de rodadura.

Peso vehicular.-

Peso de un vehículo o configuración vehicular con accesorios, en condiciones de operación, sin carga.

Remolque.-

Vehículo con eje delantero giratorio, o semirremolque con convertidor y eje trasero fijo, no dotado de medios de propulsión y destinado a ser jalado por un vehículo automotor, o acoplado a un camión o tractocamión articulado.

Secretaría.-

Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes.

Semirremolque.-

Vehículo sin eje delantero, destinado a ser acoplado a un tractocamión de manera que sea jalado y parte de su peso sea soportado por éste.

Sistema antibloqueo para frenos.-

Equipo electrónico de seguridad que mediante sensores de rotación rotación instalados en los ejes, auxilian al sistema de frenos de servicio principal, evitando que éstos se bloqueen.

Subcontratista.-

Transportista contratado por una empresa de transporte privada para prestar el servicio de autotransporte federal.

Suspensión neumática.-

Sistema de seguridad de los vehículos conformado por elementos mecánicos y estructurales flexibles que unen a los ejes con el chasis o estructura autoportante, en la que el principal elemento es un sistema neumático, que amortigua las vibraciones.

Tractocamión.-

Vehículo automotor semirremolques.

Tractocamión articulado.-

Vehículo destinado al transporte de carga, constituido por un tractocamión y un semirremolque.

Tractocamión doblemente articulado.-

Vehículo destinado al transporte de carga, constituido por un tractocamión, un semirremolque y un remolque u otro semirremolque, acoplados mediante mecanismos de articulación.

Tren Motriz.-

Conjunto de elementos conformados por motor, transmisión, diferencial y ejes.

Unidad vehicular tipo góndola o madrina.-

Configuración vehicular integrada por un camión-remolque; tractocamión-semirremolque o tractocamión-semirremolqueremolque o tractocamión –semirremolque-semirremo –semirremolque-semirremolque, lque, destinada al transporte de vehículos sin rodar.

destinado

a

soportar

5. Clasificación de vehículos Para los fines de esta Norma los vehículos se clasifican en: 5.1. Atendiendo 5.1. Atendiendo a su clase. CLASE AUTOBUS

NOMENCLATURA B

CAMION UNITARIO

C

CAMION REMOLQUE

C-R

TRACTOCAMION ARTICULADO

T-S

TRACTOCAMION DOBLEMENTE ARTICULADO

T-S-R y T-S-S

y

arrastrar


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

5.2. Atendiendo 5.2. Atendiendo a su clase, nomenclatura, número de ejes y llantas. TABLA 5.2.1 AUTOBUS ( B )

NOMENCLATURA

NUMERO DE EJES

NUMERO DE LLANTAS

B2

2

6

B3

3

8 o 10

B4

4

10

CONFIGURACION DEL VEHICULO

TABLA 5.2.2 CAMION UNITARIO ( C ) NOMENCLATURA

NUMERO DE EJES

NUMERO DE LLANTAS

C2

2

6

C3

3

8-10


CAMION-REMOLQUE ( C-R ) NOMENCLATURA

NUMERO DE EJES

NUMERO DE LLANTAS

C2-R2

4

14

C3-R2

5

18

C2-R3

5

18


9

10

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL

C3-R3

6


22

TABLA 5.2.3 TRACTOCAMION ARTICULADO NOMENCLATURA

NUMERO DE EJES

NUMERO DE LLANTAS

T2-S1

3

10

T2-S2

4

14

T2-S3

5

18

T3-S1

4

14

T3-S2

5

18

T3-S3

6

22


TABLA 5.2.4 TRACTOCAMION SEMIRREMOLQUE-REMOLQUE (T-S-R) NOMENCLATURA

NUMERO DE EJES

NUMERO DE LLANTAS

T2-S1-R2

5

18

T2-S2-R2

6

22

T2-S1-R3

6

22

T3-S1-R2

6

22

T3-S1-R3

7

26

T3-S2-R2(1)

7

26

T3-S2-R3

8

30

T3-S2-R4(1)

9

34

T2-S2-S2

6

22

T3-S2-S2

7

26

T3-S3-S2

8

30


Martes 1 de abril de 2008 (1)

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

11

Las configuraciones configuraciones T3-S2-R2 y T3-S2-R4 podrán comprender comprender un semirremolque semirremolque de tres ejes con eje retráctil, siempre y cuando no se exceda el número máximo de ejes autorizado ni el peso bruto vehicular máximo para el T3-S2-R2 y T3-S2-R4 respectivamente. En todo caso, dicho eje retráctil deberá estar levantado durante la circulación del vehículo.

5.2.5 Las figuras indicadas en las tablas de la 5.2.1 a la 5.2.4 son enunciativas no limitativas. 6. Especificaciones 6.1. De 6.1. De peso. Estas especificaciones especificaciones deben interpretarse como los pesos d e las masas cuyos valores se indican. 6.1.1. Peso 6.1.1. Peso máximo por eje. 6.1.1.1 Las concentraciones máximas de carga por daño a pavimentos por eje de acuerdo al tipo de camino en que transitan, son las indicadas en la tabla “A” del “A” del apéndice normativo. Con el propósito de que los vehículos de pasajeros que cuenten con suspensión neumática, circulen con mayor seguridad al permitir una mejor distribución del peso bruto vehicular en los ejes, la Secretaría podrá autorizar exclusivamente exclusivamente para el eje delantero una concentración máxima de carga de 7,5 t. Asimismo la carga debe ser colocada para que cumpla con el peso bruto vehicular autorizado y la concentración de carga por eje o configuración de ejes, no exceda lo establecido en la tabla “ A” A” de cargas por eje. 6.1.2 Peso bruto vehicular máximo autorizado. 6.1.2.1 El peso bruto vehicular máximo autorizado para cada vehículo o configuración vehicular, según el tipo de camino en que transitan, es el indicado en la tabla “B”, considerando la suma de pesos por eje y l a 1/ fórmula puente . 6.1.2.2 El peso bruto vehicular máximo autorizado para los vehículos y configuraciones vehiculares, se podrá incrementar en 1,5 t en cada eje motriz y 1,0 t en cada eje de carga exclusivamente cuando circulen por caminos tipo “ET” y “A”, “A” , siempre y cuando cumplan con todas y cada una de las especificaciones técnicas, disposiciones de seguridad y de control siguientes: 6.1.2.2.1 Para vehículos o configuraciones vehiculares nuevos o que se incorporen al servicio de autotransporte federal y transporte privado, a partir de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma. AUTOBUS Y S S E A C E D I T N N E N E A D C E M E N G I A M T O I V C O S I S I E C M D I T N S I E N F A A O N C S J I A R E B M N A E A T O T I N C D N I O O C D C N O C

N O I C A R U R G I A F L N U O C C I H O E V O L U C I H E V



B2

O C I N O R T C E L E R O T O M



E D E R O B I L R R O A I T O N N L I O E X M O I U , R F C A E C O I O P R R N A F C O E S R E D F A E D D R A T E R 

O E U Q S O O L N B I E T R N F A A A R M A E P T S I S



L A N E O R I I A C C ) E E O D I R R N D E T O I E N J S A N E L E E O P T D S P U E S C X E (



1/

La fórmula puente considerada es la siguiente:

PBV

870

DE * N

(3,66 * N)

11

N -1

En donde: PBV = DE = N=

Peso Bruto Vehicular en kilogramos. Distancia entre ejes extremos (medida (medida del centro del eje delantero, delantero, al centro del último eje del vehículo vehículo o configuración configuración vehicular). Número de ejes.

12

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


B3 (8)











B3 (10)











B4











CAMION Y CAMION-REMOLQUE ) 1 (

O O L U C I H E V

N O I C A R U G I F N O C

S N E E O T M C A N A I J A A ) T S I B N I R C I F E M y D S D A C E N N Y T ( O O N S O E C I S C A C T R I I C N A D E E T N N D G N O A N I V O C C O C E E I M S D I M E

O C I N O R T C E L E R O T O M

O M I N I ) M C ( P H N O C

R A I L I X U A O N E R F

E R B I O L R O O N T E N O R O I ) M F C C , C ( E O I P R R A O F C D E S A D E D E R D A T E R

O D A P I U Q E R O D I T R E V N O C

E D A N E D D A A C D I E R L B U O G D E S N O C

O E U Q O L B I T N A A M E T S I S

S O N E R F A R A P

) R y C (

E R I A E D N O I S N E P S U S

L A N O I C C ) E O R I R E D T E N J A E L O E T D P E C X E (

C2



195



-





C3



215



-





C2-R2



250









C3-R2



250









C3-R3



260









C2-R3



250









) R y C (

TRACTOCAMION-SEMIRREMOLQUE; TRACTOCAMION-SEMIRREMOLQUE-REMOLQUE Y TRACTOCAMION-SEMIRREMOLQUE-SEMIRREMOLQUE ) 1 N ( O I C A R U G I R F A L N U O C I C H O E V O L U C I H E V

y S E A S , D I C T N N ( E A E S M C D E A E N T T M O N I E C I O S I D C I G I M N S E V ) I O F A S R C J E T S R E A N A N B A T O E N I N I D M O C I Y A C D T N N O O C C

T2-S1 T2-S2 T3-S2 T3-S3 T2-S3 T3-S1 T2-S1-R2



T2-S2-R2 T2-S1-R3 T3-S1-R2 T3-S1-R3 T3-S2-R2 T3-S2-R4 T3-S2-R3 T3-S3-S2



T2-S2-S2 T3-S2-S2



     

      



O C I O R N I M ) O O N T T R I ( O T M C P M E H L E

) T ( O M I ) e i N I p M b l ( E U Q R O T

) T ( N I A O C M I C N I A R M T ) D b l A E ( D D I S C E A J P E A C S O L E D

E R B I O L R O O T N E N O O I R O M F C ) N E C T I ( E O R R D R F F R O A E I D L I A D D X R U A A T E R

260 300 350 350 350 300 350

660 800 1 050 1 050 1 050 800 1 250

30 000



350 370 370 400 400 450 450 400

1 250 1 250 1 250 1 650 1 650 1 850 1 850 1 650

30 000 30 000 40 000 44 000 44 000 46 000 44 000 44 000

370 400

1 250 1 650

30 000 44 000



O E D D A A P I N U E Q D D E A A C D I R O E L R D B U I T O G R D E E N S V N O O C C

) O O R E E E U J E E T Q S D N A ) O O ) L N R N O R T L E B O y I E I P D y T R S S E - S L , N F , N C A T A A T ( E X N ( E P A R ( O S A I M U E C E P R S I C T A E S I R S I D























-

















































































   





-

Martes 1 de abril de 2008 (1)

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

13

Los remolques y semirremolques que se utilizan en este tipo de configuraciones vehiculares además deben estar equipados con cámaras de frenado de doble acción (estacionamiento y servicio), excepto en el eje autodireccional.

Nota.- La potencia del motor, torque y capacidad de los ejes, se indican en unidades del sistema inglés, por ser éstas como comúnmente se les identifican y facilitar su cumplimiento. Las conversiones al sistema internacional son: 1 HP = 0,7457 Kw; 1Lb-pie = 1,3558 Nw-m y 1 Lb = 0,454 kg.

6.1.2.2.2 Los vehículos o configuraciones vehiculares que hayan ingresado al servicio de autotransporte federal y transporte privado antes de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma, deben cumplir con las especificaciones y disposiciones señaladas en las tablas del numeral anterior (6.1.2.2.1), excepto en lo referente al motor electrónico y sistema antibloqueo para frenos. 6.1.2.2.3 Para acceder a los incrementos de peso a que se hace referencia en el numeral 6.1.2.2, los vehículos deberán cumplir adicionalmente con lo siguiente: Vehículos de carga I.-

II.-

III.-

De Tránsito: a)

Velocidad máxima de 80 km/h, o la que se indique en el señalamiento, cuando ésta sea menor.

b)

Confinado al carril de la extrema derecha, excepto en rebase.

c)

Luces encendidas permanentemente.

d)

Circular con un mínimo de 100 m de separación respecto de otros vehículos pesados.

Del conductor: a)

Conductores con capacitación y licencia específica.

b)

Uso de bitácora de horas de servicio.

De control para la empresa: a)

Contrato privado y/o carta de porte entre el usuario y el transportista, cuando se trate de transportaciones de carro por entero donde las partes acepten la responsabilidad solidaria, a efecto de precisar la responsabilidad de cada uno de ellos en el cumplimiento de la normatividad, dejando claramente establecido en este contrato y/o en la carta de porte la ruta asignada, la carga y el peso bruto vehicular.

6.1.2.2.4 Vehículos de pasaje y turismo: I.-

De Tránsito: a)

Velocidad máxima de 95 km/h o la que se indique en el señalamiento cuando ésta sea menor.

b)

Confinado al carril de la extrema derecha, excepto en rebase.

c)

Luces encendidas permanentemente.

d)

Circular con un mínimo de 100 m de separación respecto de otros vehículos pesados.

6.1.2.3 Las especificaciones indicadas en el numeral 6.1.2.2.1, se verificarán por personal autorizado dependiente de la Secretaría o Unidades de Verificación Físico-Mecánicas autorizadas, debiendo cambiar su tarjeta de circulación por otra, en la que se asentará que cumple con dichas especificaciones. 6.1.2.4 Los autotanques que hayan ingresado al servicio de autotransporte federal y transporte privado, antes de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma, podrán transitar en las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal con el peso bruto vehicular de acuerdo con su capacidad de diseño, únicamente durante un plazo que no excederá de tres años a p artir de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma. 6.2 Dimensiones. 6.2.1 Dimensiones máximas autorizadas. 6.2.1.1 El ancho máximo autorizado para todas las clases de vehículos que transitan en los diferentes tipos de caminos, será de 2,60 m, este ancho máximo no incluye los espejos retrovisores, elementos de sujeción y demás aditamentos para el aseguramiento de la carga. Estos accesorios no deben sobresalir más de 20 cm a cada lado del vehículo.

14

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


6.2.1.2 La altura máxima autorizada para todas las clases de vehículos que transitan en los diferentes tipos de caminos, será de 4,25 m. 6.2.1.3 El largo máximo autorizado para los vehículos clase autobús y camión unitario, se indica en la tabla “C” de esta Norma. 6.2.1.4 El largo total máximo autorizado para las configuraciones camión remolque (CR), según el tipo de camino por el que transitan, se indica en la tabla “C” de esta Norma. 6.2.1.5 El largo total máximo autorizado para la configuración tractocamión articulado (TS), según el tipo de camino por el que transitan, se indica en la tabla “C” de esta Norma. Cuando la longitud del semirremolque sea mayor que 14,63 m en las configuraciones vehiculares a que se refiere la tabla “C” éstos deberán cumplir con las siguientes disposiciones de seguridad: a)

El tractocamión deberá contar con espejos auxiliares en la parte delantera, ubicados en las salpicaderas (guarda fangos) y/o cubierta del motor, dependiendo del diseño de la carrocería.

b)

Portar en la parte posterior del semirremolque, un letrero fijo (rótulo o calcomanía), con dimensiones de 0,80 X 0,60 m y una leyenda “PRECAUCI ON AL REBASAR”, en fondo naranja reflejante y letras negras.

6.2.1.6 El largo total máximo para las configuraciones tractocamión doblemente articulado (TSR y TSS), según el tipo de camino por el que transitan, se indica en la tabla “C” de esta Norma. 6.2.1.6.1 Dentro de la longitud total máxima autorizada de 31,00 m y 28,50 m a que se refiere la Tabla “C”, para las configuraciones camión con remolque y tractocamión doblemente articulado, no se permite el acoplamiento de semirremolques o remolques con longitudes mayores a 13,70 m, ni de 3 ejes (S3) para el caso de configuraciones de tractocamión-semirremolque-remolque (T-S-R), excepto que el tercer eje sea retráctil, siempre y cuando éste, se encuentre levantado durante la circulación de la configuración vehicular. 6.2.1.6.2 Los conductores que operan estas configuraciones vehiculares, deberán acreditar la capacitación que determine la Secretaría. 6.2.1.7 Para las configuraciones vehiculares que trasladan automóviles sin rodar que transitan en caminos tipo “ET”, “A” y “B”, se permite 1,00 m de carga sobresaliente, en la parte posterior del último semirremolque o remolque de la configuración. 6.2.1.7.1 Cuando se trate de carga sobresaliente en la parte superior frontal de la configuración tipo góndola o madrina, se permite 1,00 m sobresaliente, siempre y cuando no se rebase la longitud máxima permitida por tipo de vehículo y de carretera. 6.2.1.8 Para las configuraciones vehiculares de tractocamión con semirremolque que transportan tubos, varillas, láminas, postes y perfiles, en plataformas, se permite hasta 2,50 m de carga sobresaliente en la parte posterior del semirremolque de la configuración, cuando transiten por caminos tipo “ET”, “A”, “B” y “C”, siempre y cuando la longitud de la carga sobresaliente más el largo de la plataforma no exceda de 14,63 m, ni se sobrepasen las dimensiones máximas permitidas por tipo de carretera para la configuración vehicular. 6.2.1.9 Para las configuraciones vehiculares de tractocamión con semirremolque, camión remolque y tractocamión doblemente articulado mencionadas en los puntos 6.2.1.7 y 6.2.1.8 a los cuales se les permite transportar carga sobresaliente, deberán cumplir con las siguientes disposiciones de seguridad: I.-

En la carga sobresaliente deberán llevar un indicador de peligro en forma rectangular de 0,30 m de altura y con un ancho equivalente al vehículo, firmemente sujeto y pintado con rayas inclinadas a 45 grados alternadas en colores negro y blanco reflejante de 0,10 m de ancho.

II.-

Cuando el vehículo circule con luz diurna, deberán colocarse en sus extremos dos banderolas rojas de forma cuadrangular de 0,40 m por lado, sujetas firmemente.

III.- Cuando el vehículo circule en horario nocturno, deberán colocarse en la carga sobresaliente, dos reflejantes y/o dos lámparas que emitan luz roja, además de dos indicadores de peligro que emitan luz roja y visible desde 150 m, además de las luces que establezca el Reglamento de Tránsito en Carreteras Federales, vigente. 6.3 Tecnologías alternativas. En caso de que hubiera nuevas tecnologías que no estén consideradas en la normatividad actual y que pudieran ser iguales o superiores en el desempeño de los vehículos o configuraciones vehiculares a que se


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

15

refiere el numeral 6.1.2.2 se les aplicarán los mismos beneficios. En este supuesto, la autorización correspondiente deberá apegarse a lo dispuesto en la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. 6.4 Casos de conectividad. 6.4.1 Vehículos de Carga. 6.4.1.1 Para las unidades y configuraciones vehiculares que requieran utilizar un camino de menor clasificación para llegar o salir de una planta productora o centro de distribución, o utilizar un camino de menor clasificación cuando no estén conectados dos ejes o tramos de un mismo eje, se deberán cumplir las condiciones siguientes: a)

Presentar a la Secretaría una solicitud de autorización especial para la utilización de las rutas en cuestión en la que el interesado señale los tramos requeridos y en su caso, indicar los nombres de los transportistas que utilizarán para la prestación del servicio, que demuestren que económicamente no es posible usar otro tipo de configuraciones vehiculares que cumplan con las especificaciones que exigen dichos tramos o que no existen rutas alternas. En caso de que los tramos que se pretendan utilizar sean de los que se requieren para entrar o salir de las plantas productoras o centros de distribución, bastará con que el interesado presente la solicitud con el señalamiento de l as carreteras a utilizar y, en su caso, los transportistas que u tilizarán para la prestación de los servicios.

b)

La Secretaría sólo podrá negar la solicitud cuando exista una carretera de mayor especificación, por cuestiones de seguridad debidamente fundadas y motivadas, o cuando el número de vehículos no justifique la modificación de la carretera en el corto plazo, excepto cuando se trate de los supuestos señalados en el segundo párrafo del inciso anterior, en el que la Secretaría no podrá, en ningún caso, negar la autorización.

c)

Para los tramos carreteros relacionados en el Anexo 1, la Secretaría no podrá negar la autorización para su utilización, de conformidad con las características de peso y dimensiones que se indican como mínimo en dicho Anexo, así como lo que establece esta Norma, independientemente de lo anterior los interesados podrán presentar solicitudes como casos de excepción para dichos tramos carreteros. Este Anexo 1 formará parte de la evaluación trianual a que se refiere el artículo TERCERO TRANSITORIO de la presente Norma.

d)

Las autorizaciones que se expidan incluirán las condiciones de tránsito y seguridad bajo las cuales se puedan utilizar los tramos d e menor especificación. La autorización se otorgará por empresa para los tipos de vehículos o configuraciones vehiculares autorizados por la Secretaría e incluidos en la solicitud, señalando los caminos en los que se permita su circulación.

e)

Cuando la autorización sea utilizada por un subcontratista, éste deberá comprometerse en el contrato respectivo, a respetar las condiciones de la autorización. El transportista autorizado deberá informar vía Internet a la Secretaría con qué subcontratista ha celebrado contratos y su vigencia, para que sea incorporado en la base de datos y considerado en las acciones de control y vigilancia.

f)

La Secretaría resolverá en un plazo no mayor de sesenta días naturales, contados a partir de la recepción de la solicitud. En caso de que no la emita en el plazo señalado, se entenderá en sentido afirmativo, y de treinta días naturales, en caso de que ya se hayan analizado solicitudes similares, de lo contrario se entenderá como en sentido afirmativo.

g)

En el supuesto previsto en el párrafo segundo del inciso a) de este numeral, deberá emitir la autorización en un plazo de diez días hábiles, en caso contrario, bastará con el acuse de recibo de la solicitud.

h)

La vigencia de las autorizaciones a que se refiere este numeral, será de cinco años y en él se indicarán, en su caso, los subcontratistas autorizados.

i)

La Secretaría publicará en su página de Internet, las autorizaciones que otorgue e integrará una base de datos de fácil consulta que puedan utilizar el personal de vigilancia, verificación e inspección de la Secretaría y de la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública.

j)

En caso de cambio de rutas deberá presentar una nueva solicitud, para el caso de cambio de subcontratistas, se deberá informar a la Secretaría.

16

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


6.4.2 Vehículos de pasajeros. 6.4.2.1 Los vehículos del servicio de autotransporte de pasajeros que requieran utilizar un camino de menor clasificación para cumplir con su recorrido, podrán efectuarlo al amparo de los permisos únicos respectivos con que cuenten. Los vehículos que requieran de un nuevo permiso de autotransporte federal de pasajeros, para utilizar un camino de menor clasificación para cumplir con su recorrido, podrán efectuarlo sujeto a las previsiones específicas contenidas en el dictamen que para el efecto emita la Secretaría sobre condiciones de seguridad. Los vehículos de autotransporte de turismo que requieran utilizar un camino de menor clasificación para cumplir con su recorrido, podrán efectuarlo sujeto a las previsiones específicas contenidas en el dictamen que para el efecto emita la Secretaría sobre condiciones de seguridad. 6.4.2.2. La vigencia del dictamen a que se refiere este numeral será de cinco años. 6.4.3 Tomando en cuenta los gálibos de los puentes y túneles de las carreteras, se otorgarán permisos especiales en rutas específicas para vehículos que transportan pasajeros y cargas de hasta 4,50 m de altura, siempre y cuando se verifique que todos los puentes y túneles presentan gálibos mayores. 7. Observancia obligatoria de esta Norma 7.1 Vehículos de fabricación nacional y de importación. 7.1.1 De conformidad con el artículo 3o. fracción XI, 40, fracciones I, III y XVI, 41 y demás relativos de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización, la presente Norma es de carácter obligatorio y en consecuencia los fabricantes, reconstructores e importadores de las unidades de autotransporte a que se refiere esta Norma, en la constancia de capacidad y dimensiones o de peso y dimensiones, que establece el reglamento y norma correspondiente, deberán indicar el peso y dimensiones que autoriza esta Norma para la unidad vehicular en cuestión, sin que éste sea mayor que el de diseño de la unidad vehicular. En el caso de vehículos fabricados para transporte con peso y dimensiones fuera de lo estipulado en la presente Norma, deberá indicarse en la constancia de capacidad y dimensiones o peso y dimensiones del mismo, que se trata de vehículos especiales sujetos a diseño específico por lo que no se ajustan a lo establecido en la presente Norma. Los vehículos de autotransporte a que se refiere esta Norma que no cumplan con el peso, dimensiones y capacidad, no podrán ser importados y transitar por las vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal. 8. Sanciones El incumplimiento a las disposiciones contenidas en la presente Norma, será sancionado conforme a lo dispuesto en la Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal, el Reglamento sobre el Peso, Dimensiones y Capacidad de los Vehículos de Autotransporte que Transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal, y demás ordenamientos jurídicos que resulten aplicables. 9. Vigilancia La Secretaría y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, se coordinarán en la vigilancia del cumplimiento de la presente Norma, en el ámbito de sus respectivas competencias. 10. Procedimiento de Evaluación de la Conformidad (PEC) 10.1 Objetivo. Establecer el procedimiento para verificar las especificaciones de peso y dimensiones que señala la presente Norma. 10.2 Unidades de medida. Especificación

Unidades

Peso*

toneladas (t), kilogramos (kg)

Largo

metros (m), centímetros (cm)

Ancho


Alto


* Las unidades corresponden a las masas de los pesos que se especifiquen. 10.3 Disposiciones Generales del PEC.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

17

10.3.1 El alto es la dimensión vertical máxima de la unidad o configuración vehicular, medida de la superficie de rodadura de la carretera hasta la parte más alta del vehículo o la carga. 10.3.2 El ancho es la dimensión transversal máxima del vehículo o configuración vehicular respecto de su eje longitudinal, con carga o sin carga (sin incluir los espejos l aterales y sistemas de sujeción). 10.3.3 Para vehículos unitarios, el largo es la longitud medida de la defensa delantera del vehículo a la estructura sólida trasera del mismo o su carga, lo que esté más atrás, sin incluir los topes de hule. Para configuraciones vehiculares, el largo es la longitud medida de la defensa delantera del primer vehículo a la estructura sólida trasera del último vehículo o su carga, lo que esté más atrás, sin incluir los topes de hule, incluyendo sus elementos de articulación. En el caso de carga sobresaliente, se considerarán las excepciones establecidas en las reglas 6.2.1.7 y 6.2.1.8. 10.3.4 Se verificará el peso bruto vehicular y dimensiones máximas de las unidades o configuraciones vehiculares que circulan por vías generales de comunicación de jurisdicción federal. 10.3.5 El cumplimiento de esta Norma se verificará por personal autorizado dependiente de la Secretaría y de la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública. Se podrá permitir la presencia de observadores representantes de organizaciones de transportistas para brindar mayor transparencia al proceso. 10.3.6 La Secretaría elaborará el procedimiento que se seguirá en la vigilancia de esta Norma en el caso de los transportistas y usuarios a los que se les reconozca el resultado de las operaciones de pesaje en básculas de su propiedad o cuando se demuestre fehacientemente el cumplimiento de la Norma, de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en el presente Procedimiento de la Evaluación de la Conformidad. 10.3.7 Se verificará el peso y dimensiones de los vehículos de autotransporte de carga cuyo peso vehicular, más el peso de la carga sea mayor a 4 t (PBV). 10.3.8 En el caso de los ejes retráctiles que no se encuentren rodando, no se considerarán en la verificación de la configuración. 10.3.9 Los sistemas de medición deben ser verificados anualmente, en los laboratorios de verificación y calibración acreditados o dependencias responsables, según corresponda, sin perjuicio de hacerlo en un plazo menor cuando por su desempeño de trabajo así lo requieran, o cuando haya sospechas y/o denuncias de mal funcionamiento. 10.3.10 Las divisiones mínimas de las básculas de pesaje por eje serán del 0,5% de la capacidad máxima de dicha báscula, de acuerdo con lo establecido por la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-010-SCFI-1994, vigente. 10.3.11 Las especificaciones de los equipos de medición señaladas en esta Norma, son de tipo general, por lo que no se establecen sus características técnicas. Las básculas que se utilicen deberán contar con la autorización de modelo y certificado de calibración vigente. 10.4 Verificación. a) La verificación tendrá por objeto, comparar el peso bruto vehicular y las dimensiones del vehículo o configuración vehicular, respecto al peso y dimensiones máximos autorizados por tipo de vehículo y camino que se establecen en la presente Norma, sin que se exceda el peso máximo de diseño del fabricante y aplicar la sanción correspondiente cuando se detecte exceso de peso y/o dimensiones. b) La Secretaría, sin perjuicio de las atribuciones que tiene conferidas la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública en la materia, verificará el peso y dimensiones de los vehículos de autotransporte federal, sus servicios auxiliares y transporte privado de conformidad con lo siguiente: Para Vehículos de Carga 1.

2.

En Centros de Verificación de Peso y Dimensiones, a través de: a)

Básculas de pesaje y equipo de medición de dimensiones.

b)

Carta de Porte debidamente documentada en términos de las disposiciones reglamentarias para verificar el peso y equipo de medición para dimensiones.

Mediante la autorregulación de usuarios y transportistas, aprobados por la Secretaría, que cuenten dentro de su proceso de embarque con básculas de plataforma y equipo de medición de dimensiones de su propiedad y que dicho proceso, garantice el cumplimiento del peso y dimensiones máximos

18

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


que establece la presente Norma en cada embarque transportado por cada tipo de vehículo y camino en donde circulen, debiendo sujetarse a las condiciones siguientes: a)

b)

Los interesados deberán presentar solicitud, anexando su procedimiento de embarque, con la descripción de cada una de las etapas del proceso de carga, así como el método de supervisión y control internos que garantizan que todos los embarques cumplen con el peso y dimensiones autorizados para los tipos de camino por donde circulan, el cual podrá ser evaluado por la Secretaría mediante muestreo en sitio para corroborar que efectivamente su aplicación garantiza el cumplimiento de la normatividad. Dicho proceso debe incluir l o siguiente: i.

Expedir un comprobante (ticket) emitido por la báscula, que deberá contener: la razón social de la empresa, la fecha y hora del pesaje, el peso vehicular (Tara), peso bruto vehicular (PBV) y el número de placas que integra la configuración vehicular.

ii.

Documento anexo donde se señale la ruta y tipo de caminos a utilizar, marca de la báscula, la fecha y número de la última calibración efectuada por la autoridad competente, así como las dimensiones máximas de la unidad vehicular utilizada.

Las básculas deberán ser del tipo electrónico con impresora integrada y contar con las siguientes dimensiones para pesar las configuraciones vehiculares que se describen: i.

Camiones unitarios y tractocamiones con semirremolque, la plataforma debe ser de: ancho no menor de 2,80 m y largo no menor de 23,0 m.

ii.

Las configuraciones vehiculares mayores de 23,0 m, podrán ser pesadas parcialmente, siempre y cuando se garantice que la medición del peso obtenido se realice con equipos certificados.

c)

Los poseedores de las básculas con alcance máximo de medición igual o mayor a 5 t deberán conservar en el local en el que se use la báscula, taras o tener acceso a éstas, cuyo mínimo equivalente sea el 5% del alcance máximo de la misma o cualquier otro mecanismo de certificación autorizado por la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización.

d)

La Secretaría y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, verificarán aleatoriamente en carretera mediante la revisión de los comprobantes de pesaje (tickets) y dimensiones que las unidades vehiculares propiedad de los usuarios y transportistas autorizados para aplicar este procedimiento de autorregulación, no rebasan el peso y dimensiones máximos permitidos por tipo de vehículo y camino en esta Norma. Lo anterior no exime que dichas dependencias puedan verificar también en forma aleatoria el cumplimiento de las disposiciones de peso y dimensiones, mediante el uso de las básculas y sistemas de medición de dimensiones de su propiedad o a través de la carta de porte correspondiente.

e)

Como requisito de aprobación, los interesados deberán contar con una fianza o fondo de garantía, por un monto de 32 000 Días de Salario Mínimo General Vigente en el Distrito Federal (DSMGVDF), misma que deberá ser cubierta por el interesado para garantizar el cumplimiento de las disposiciones de autorregulación contenidas en la presente Norma y en la autorización respectiva.

f)

Los usuarios y transportistas de cuyas unidades vehiculares, se detecte en el proceso de verificación aleatoria por más de tres ocasiones durante el periodo de un año, que rebasan los límites de peso y dimensiones máximos permitidos, se les suspenderá la autorización de autorregulación y se aplicará la fianza correspondiente. En el caso de los usuarios, siempre y cuando no demuestre que el transportista alteró la carga transportada.

g)

Los transportistas al servicio de los usuarios aprobados para efectuar el proceso de autorregulación, deberán contar además del comprobante de pesaje (ticket) y dimensiones, con una carta de prestación de servicio expedida por el usuario.

h)

Las básculas registradas como parte del proceso de embarque de autorregulación, deberán contar con la certificación correspondiente expedida por la Secretaría de Economía o la Procuraduría Federal del Consumidor y contar con su informe de calibración vigente.


3.

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

19

Mediante la autorregulación de usuarios y transportistas aprobados por la Secretaría, que demuestren contar con un mismo proceso de embarque, el cual garantice el cumplimiento del peso y dimensiones máximos que establece la presente Norma en cada embarque transportado para cada clase de vehículo y camino en d onde circulen, debiendo sujetarse a las condiciones siguientes: a)

Los interesados deberán presentar solicitud, anexando su procedimiento de embarque, el cual deberá contener la descripción de cada una de las etapas del proceso de carga, demostrando que por las características de sus vehículos, productos a transportar y envases y embalajes utilizados, que el peso y dimensiones máximos es similar y no excede los límites de peso y dimensiones autorizados para cada tipo de vehículo y camino por el que transiten; asimismo deberá indicarse el método de supervisión y control internos empleados para ello. Este procedimiento podrá ser evaluado por la Secretaría mediante muestreo en sitio para corroborar que efectivamente su aplicación garantiza el cumplimiento de la normatividad.

b)

La Secretaría y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, verificarán aleatoriamente en carretera mediante la revisión de los comprobantes de embarque, que las unidades vehiculares propiedad de los usuarios y transportistas autorizados para aplicar este procedimiento de autorregulación, no rebasan el peso y dimensiones máximos permitidos por clase de vehículo y camino en esta Norma. Lo anterior no exime que dichas dependencias puedan verificar también en forma aleatoria el cumplimiento de las disposiciones de peso y dimensiones, mediante el uso de las básculas y sistemas de medición de dimensiones de su propiedad o a través de la carta de porte correspondiente.

c)

Como requisito de aprobación, los interesados deberán contar con una fianza o fondo de garantía, por un monto de 32 000 DSMGVDF, misma que deberá ser cubierta por el interesado para garantizar el cumplimiento de las disposiciones de autorregulación contenidas en la presente Norma y en la autorización respectiva.

d)

Los usuarios y transportistas de cuyas unidades vehiculares, se detecte en el proceso de verificación aleatoria por más de tres ocasiones durante el periodo de un año, que rebasan los límites de peso y dimensiones máximos permitidos se les suspenderá la autorización de autorregulación, y se aplicará la fianza correspondiente.

e)

Los transportistas al servicio de usuarios aprobados para efectuar el proceso de a utorregulación, deberán contar además del comprobante de embarque, con una carta de prestación de servicio expedida por el usuario.

Para vehículos de Pasajeros 1.

Unicamente se verificará en las instalaciones del transportista o terminales, y previa notificación con cinco días de anticipación. En este caso la Secretaría, podrá comisionar a servidores públicos a su servicio, que exhiban identificación vigente y orden de visita, en la que se especifiquen las disposiciones cuyo cumplimiento habrán de verificarse.

10.5 Unidades de Verificación. La Secretaría, podrá autorizar a terceros, para que lleven a cabo verificaciones de la presente Norma, de acuerdo con lo establecido en la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. 10.6 Dependencias y Organismos que intervienen en la verificación. El PEC es de aplicación general, la Secretaría y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, se coordinarán en la vigilancia del cumplimiento de la presente Norma, en el ámbito de sus respectivas competencias. 11. Métodos de prueba 11.1 Para el control del peso y dimensiones de los vehículos, se utilizarán sistemas de medición, manuales o electrónicos o bien, las tecnologías más avanzadas de que se disponga en el mercado. 11.2 El control se deberá efectuar considerando lo señalado en el PEC de la presente Norma.

20

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


11.3 Cuando el peso de los vehículos se determine por pesada estática, la verificación de los instrumentos para pesar deberá seguir los métodos establecidos para ello en la NOM-010-SCFI-1994, “Instrumentos de medición-instrumentos para pesar de funcionamiento no automático-requisitos técnicos y metrológicos, o equivalente en vigor”. 11.4 Los instrumentos para medir que conformen estos sistemas de medición, deben ser verificados; las verificaciones deben ser efectuadas por la Procuraduría Federal del Consumidor. 11.5 En todos los casos, las básculas fijas para el control del peso deben verificarse en el sitio donde se utilicen; para las básculas móviles dicha verificación podrá efectuarse además en el lugar donde se utilicen; o se encuentren para su resguardo. Adicionalmente se debe tener el procedimiento de medición del peso y dimensiones en el sitio donde se verifiquen, de acuerdo a lo que determina la Ley Federal Sobre Metrología y Normalización, el cual estará a disposición de las asociaciones u organizaciones de transportistas en caso de requerirse. Este procedimiento deberá contener además de lo que establece esta Norma, las características generales del terreno y equipamiento del centro de verificación, así como de la operación de proceso de pesaje. 11.6 Los instrumentos para pesar que se utilicen para evaluar la conformidad con las especificaciones de esta Norma, deberá tener una división de la escala no mayor de 0,5% de la capacidad máxima de dicha báscula, de acuerdo con lo establecido por la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-010-SCFI-1994, “Instrumentos de medición-instrumentos para pesar de funcionamiento no automático-requisitos técnicos y metrológicos”, vigente y sus dictámenes correspondientes. 11.7 El personal que opere las básculas tanto de las empresas, como de la Secretaría y la Secretaría de Seguridad Pública, en caso de ser requeridos por la Secretaría de Economía, deben demostrar que reúnen los conocimientos de capacidad que se requieran, para los efectos del artículo 19 de la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización. 12. Concordancia con normas internacionales La presente Norma fue elaborada con fundamento en las condiciones de la infraestructura carretera nacional, la seguridad vial en las carreteras y tomando en cuenta las características y especificaciones del parque vehicular existente, por lo que no necesariamente es concordante con ninguna norma internacional. 13. Transitorios PRIMERO.- Se abroga la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-012-SCT-2-1995, sobre el peso y dimensiones máximas con los que pueden circular los vehículos de autotransporte que transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal, publicada en el Diario Oficial de la Federación el 7 de enero de 1997, y sus ratificaciones de conformidad con las revisiones quinquenales, que establece la Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización y demás disposiciones administrativas y técnicas que se opongan a la presente Norma. SEGUNDO.- Se autoriza a las configuraciones vehiculares tipo T3-S2-R4 y T3-S2-R3, circular exclusivamente en caminos tipo “ET” y “A”, con un peso adicional de 4,5 t al peso bruto vehicular máximo de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en el numeral 6.1.2.2, por un período de 5 a ños. TERCERO.- Esta Norma Oficial Mexicana incluyendo sus artículos transitorios, será evaluada por parte de Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre en un plazo de 3 años a partir de su entrada en vigor. CUARTO.- Se otorga un plazo de seis meses contados a partir de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma, para que todos los transportistas cuyas unidades y configuraciones vehiculares se encuentren dentro de los supuestos mencionados en el numeral 6.4, referente a casos de conectividad, tramiten y obtengan los permisos especiales correspondientes, o en su caso, la Secretaría emita el dictamen para los servicios de pasaje y turismo. Durante este plazo, los vehículos de carga podrán circular presentando la solicitud de permiso con sello de acuse de recibo de la Dirección General de Autotransporte Federal; los vehículos de autotransporte de pasaje y turismo, podrán circular en las condiciones en que lo vienen realizando, hasta que la Secretaría emita el dictamen al que deben de sujetarse. Las autorizaciones que se hayan otorgado con fundamento en el tercer párrafo del artículo 6o. del Reglamento sobre el Peso, Dimensiones y Capacidad de los Vehículos de Autotransporte que Transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal, seguirán vigentes en los términos otorgados.


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

21

QUINTO.- Las carreteras que sean objeto de reclasificación, una vez que sean reclasificadas, se determinará cuales pueden adicionarse al Anexo 1, relativas al tema de conectividad, en los demás casos se requerirá solicitar autorización y la Secretaría determinará de manera fundada y motivada su otorgamiento o no. SEXTO.- Todos los vehículos que se encuentran en operación, así como los que se den de alta a partir de la entrada en vigor de la presente Norma, deberán cumplir con las disposiciones que en ella se contienen. SEPTIMO.- La Norma Oficial Mexicana entrará en vigor 60 días naturales después de su fecha de publicación en el Diario Oficial de la Federación. 14. Bibliografía ■

Manual de Proyecto Geométrico de Carreteras Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes. Normas de Servicios Técnicos Proyecto Geométrico de Carreteras Secretaría de Comunicaciones y Transportes.

■

Todo Transporte No. 75 "Adaptación a la Legislación Comunitaria, Pesos y Dimensiones". (Febrero 1991).

■

Heavy Truck Weight and Dimension Regulations for Interprovincial Operations in Canada. (November 1992).

■

Vehicle Sizes and Weight Manual "Vehicle Sizes & Weights Char" (1992).

■

Traffic Engineering Handbook Institute of Transportation Engineers (1992).

■

A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets American Association on State Highway and Transportation Officials (1990).

■

New Trucks for Greater Productivity and Less Road Wear Transportation Research Board National Research Council.

■

Truck Weight Limits Transportation Research Board National Research Council.

■

Motor Truck Engineering Handbook.

■

Providing Access for Large Trucks Transportation Research Board National Research Council.

■

Ley de Caminos, Puentes y Autotransporte Federal.

■

Ley Federal sobre Metrología y Normalización.

■

Reglamento sobre el Peso, Dimensiones y Capacidad de los Vehículos de Autotransporte que Transitan en los Caminos y Puentes de Jurisdicción Federal.

■

Reglamento para el Transporte Terrestre de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos.

■

Análisis de los Coeficientes de Daños Unitarios Correspondientes a los Vehículos Autorizados en la Red Nacional de Carreteras Federales Mexicanas. Publicación Técnica No. 5 Querétaro, Qro., 1992;

■

Estado Superficial y Costos de Operación en Carreteras. Publicación Técnica No. 30 Querétaro, Qro., 1991;

■

Cuatro Contribuciones a la Evaluación Cuantitativa de las Actividades del Transporte. Publicación Técnica No. 55 Querétaro, Qro., 1994;

■

Estudio de Pesos y Dimensiones de los Vehículos que Circulan sobre las Carreteras Nacionales; Impactos Económicos de la Reglamentación y el Control de Pesos y Dimensiones. Publicación Técnica No. 51 Querétaro, Qro., 1994;

■

Estudio de Pesos y Dimensiones de los Vehículos que Circulan sobre las Carreteras Nacionales; Análisis Económico de los Efectos del Peso de los Vehículos de Carga Autorizados en la Red Nacional de Carreteras. Publicación Técnica No. 52 Querétaro, Qro., 1994;

■

Consideraciones Operativas y de Proyecto Geométrico para Vehículos de Carga. Publicación Técnica No. 106 Querétaro, Qro., 1998.

22

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


■

Directiva 96/53 de la Comunidad Europea, que Establece para Determinados Vehículos de Carretera las Dimensiones y Pesos Máximos Autorizados.

■

Directiva 97/27 de la Comunidad Europea, Relativa a las Masas y Dimensiones de Determinadas Categorías de Vehículos de Motor y de sus Remolques.

Dada en la Ciudad de México, a 27 de marzo de 2008.- El Subsecretario de Transporte y Presidente del Comité Consultivo Nacional de Normalización de Transporte Terrestre, Manuel Rodríguez Arregui.- Rúbrica. 15. Apéndice normativo "PESO Y DIMENSIONES MAXIMAS AUTORIZADAS POR TIPO DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO" TABLA A

PESO MAXIMO AUTORIZADO (t), POR TIPO DE EJE Y CAMINO.

TABLA B

PESO BRUTO VEHICULAR MAXIMO AUTORIZADO (t), POR TIPO DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO.

TABLA C

LARGO MAXIMO AUTORIZADO (m), POR TIPO DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO.

TABLA A PESOS MAXIMOS AUTORIZADOS POR TIPO DE EJE Y CAMINO (t) TIPO DE CAMINO CONFIGURACION DE EJES

ET4 Y ET2 A4 Y A2

B4 Y B2

C

D

6,50

6,00

5,50

5,00

10,00

9,50

8,00

7,00

11,00

10,50

9,00

8,00

15,00

13,00

11,50

11,00

17,00

15,00

13,50

12,00

18,00

17,00

14,50

13,50

23,50

22,50

20,00

NA

SENCILLO DOS LLANTAS SENCILLO CUATRO LLANTAS MOTRIZ SENCILLO CUATRO LLANTAS MOTRIZ DOBLE O TANDEM SEIS LLANTAS DOBLE O TANDEM OCHO LLANTAS

MOTRIZ DOBLE O TANDEM OCHO LLANTAS

TRIPLE O TRIDEM DOCE LLANTAS

NA = NO AUTORIZADO (1)

En el caso de los vehículos de pasajeros, la Secretaría, con el propósito de promover la seguridad, autoriza descargas en los vehículos que cuenten con suspensión neumática, con una concentración máxima de 7,5 t en el eje delantero.

TABLA B PESO BRUTO VEHICULAR MAXIMO AUTORIZADO POR CLASE DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO VEHICULO O CONFIGURACION VEHICULAR B2

PESO BRUTO VEHICULAR (t) NUM. EJES

NUM. LLANTAS

2

6

ET y A

B

C

D

17,5

16,5

14,5

13,0


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

23

B3

3

8

21,5

19,0

17,0

16,0

B3

3

10

24,5

23,0

20,0

18,5

B4

4

10

27,0

25,0

22,5

21,0

C2

2

6

17,5

16,5

14,5

13,0

C3

3

8

21,5

19,0

17,0

16,0

C3

3

10

24,5

23,0

20,0

18,5

C2-R2

4

14

37,5

35,5

NA

NA

C3-R2

5

18

44,5

42,0

NA

NA

C3-R3

6

22

51,5

47,5

NA

NA

C2-R3

5

18

44,5

41,0

NA

NA

T2-S1

3

10

27,5

26,0

22,5

NA

T2-S2

4

14

34,5

31,5

28,0

NA

T3-S2

5

18

41,5

38,0

33,5

NA

T3-S3

6

22

48,0

45,5

40,0

NA

T2-S3

5

18

41,0

39,0

34,5

NA

T3-S1

4

14

34,5

32,5

28,0

NA

T2-S1-R2

5

18

47,5

45,0

NA

NA

T2-S1-R3

6

22

54,5

50,5

NA

NA

T2-S2-R2

6

22

54,5

50,5

NA

NA

T3-S1-R2

6

22

54,5

51,5

NA

NA

T3-S1-R3

7

26

60,5

57,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-R2

7

26

60,5

57,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-R4

9

34

66,5

66,0

NA

NA

T3-S2-R3

8

30

63,0

62,5

NA

NA

T3-S3-S2

8

30

60,0

60,0

NA

NA

T2-S2-S2

6

22

51,5

46,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-S2

7

26

58,5

53,0

NA

NA

NA- No Autorizado

TABLA C LARGO MAXIMO AUTORIZADO POR CLASE DE VEHICULO Y CAMINO VEHICULO O CONFIGURACION VEHICULAR

NUM. EJES

LARGO TOTAL (m)

NUM. LLANTAS ET y A

B

C

D

B2

2

6

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

B3

3

8

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

B3

3

10

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

B4

4

10

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

C2

2

6

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

C3

3

8

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

C3

3

10

14,0

14,0

14,0

12,5

C2-R2

4

14

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

C3-R2

5

18

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

C3-R3

6

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

C2-R3

5

18

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T2-S1

3

10

23,0

20,8

18,5

NA

T2-S2

4

14

23,0

20,8

18,5

NA

T3-S2

5

18

23,0

20,8

18,5

NA

T3-S3

6

22

23,0

20,8

18,5

NA

T2-S1-R2

5

18

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

24

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


T2-S1-R3

6

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T2-S2-R2

6

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S1-R2

6

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S1-R3

7

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-R2

7

26

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-R4

9

34

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-R3

8

30

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S3-S2

8

30

25,0

25,0

NA

NA

T2-S3

5

18

23,0

20,0

18,0

NA

T3-S1

4

14

23,0

20,0

18,0

NA

T2-S2-S2

6

22

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

T3-S2-S2

7

26

31,0

28,5

NA

NA

NA-No Autorizado 16. Anexo 1, Tramos carreteros a que se refiere el numeral 6.4.1.1 inciso (c) de casos de conectividad. ANEXO 1 TRAMOS CARRETEROS A QUE SE REFIERE EL NUMERAL 6.4.1.1 INCISO (c) DE CASOS DE CONECTIVIDAD. CORREDOR 1 MEXICO-TIJUANA No.

Carretera

1 2

México-Toluca

3

Tramo

Peso y Dimensiones que se podrán autorizar

México-La Marquesa(Directo)

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

México-La Marquesa (Libre)

Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

La Marquesa-Toluca


Toluca-Atlacomulco


4

Toluca-Palmillas

5

Atlacomulco-Maravatío (Directo)


6

Maravatío-Zapotlanejo (Directo)


7

Zapotlanejo-Guadalajara (Directo)


8

GuadalajaraTepic(Directo)


9

Tepic-Ent. San Blas (Directo)


10

Tepic-Mazatlán (Guadalajara-Mazatlán, libre)

En la carretera Tepic-Mazatlán tramo Villa UniónMazatlán se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximos de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. En el resto de la longitud deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "C".

11

Ent. Escuinapa-Ent. Rosario (Directo)

Ent. San Blas-Ent. Escuinapa



12

DIARIO OFICIAL

Ent. Rosario-Villa Unión

Tepic-Mazatlán

13

(Primera Sección)

25

En la carretera Tepic-Mazatlán tramo Villa UniónMazatlán se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximos de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. En el resto de la longitud deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "C".

Villa Unión-Mazatlán

14

Libramiento Mazatlán


15

MazatlánCuliacán(Directo)


16


Culiacán- Las Brisas(Directo)

17

Las Brisas- Los Mochis


18

Los Mochis-Cd. Obregón


19

Cd. Obregón-Hermosillo


20

Hermosillo-Nogales


21

Santa Ana-Sonoita

22

Sonoita-San Colorado

Río

Para el tramo Altar-Caborca se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones para caminos tipo “A”. Para el tramo Caborca -San Luis Río Colorado se autorizará la circulación de TSR y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

23

San Luis Río ColoradoMexicali


24

Mexicali-Tijuana(Directo)


25

Cabo San Lucas-La Paz

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y Cabo San Lucas-Ent. dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades Apto. Los Cabos vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

Luis

26

Ent. Apto. Los Cabos-La Paz

Se autorizará la circulación de TSR y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

27

Morelia-Salamanca

Morelia-Ent. (Carr. Maravatío-Zapotlanejo)

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma en tanto se concluye la construcción de la autopista.

28

Morelia-Pátzcuaro, carretera libre de cuatro carriles


29

Pátzcuaro-Nva. Italia (Directo)


30

Ramal a Uruapan(Directo)


31

Nva. Italia-Lázaro Cárdenas(Directo)


32

La Mira (Lázaro Cárdenas)-Zihuatanejo

Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "D"

33

Zihuatanejo-Acapulco

Se autorizará la circulación de TSR y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

26

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


34

Tijuana-San Miguel (Directo)


35

Piggy Back-Costa Rica (Directo)


36

Imuris-Agua Prieta

37

Chapalilla-Compostela (Directo)


38

Tepic-Puerto Vallarta

Para el tramo Cruz de Huanacaxtle-Puerto Vallarta, se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones para caminos tipo “A”. Para el tramo Compostela - Cruz de Huanacaxtle, se autorizará la circulación de T-S-R y m enores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B, en tanto se construye la autopista Jala-Cruz de Huanacaxtle.

39

Estación Patti-Briseñas


40

La Piedad - EcuandureoZamora (La Piedad Rinconada)

En el tramo la Piedad - Zamora se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

Se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

CORREDOR 2 MEXICO - NVO. LAREDO; PIEDRAS NEGRAS No. 41

Carretera México-Querétaro

42

Tramo


México-Palmillas (Directo)

Se autorizará la circulación con los dimensiones máximas de todas las vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades

Palmillas-Querétaro


pesos y unidades

43

Libramiento Noreste Qro. (Directo)


pesos y unidades

44

Querétaro-SLP


pesos y unidades

45

Libramiento Oriente SLP


pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los dimensiones máximas de todas las vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma

pesos y unidades

Libramiento Matehuala


pesos y unidades

46

SLP-Matehuala

47

Matehuala-Saltillo

Matehuala-Arteaga


pesos y unidades

48

Matehuala-Saltillo

Arteaga-Saltillo


pesos y unidades

49

Libramiento Oriente Saltillo (Directo)


pesos y unidades

50

Saltillo-Monterrey

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma, en tanto se concluye la construcción de la autopista Monterrey Saltillo.

51

Libramiento Monterrey

Ent. (Carr. Salt.-Mty)Ent. (Carr. Mty-Laredo)

Se autorizará la circulación con dimensiones máximas de todas

los las

pesos y unidades


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

27

vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. 52

53 54 55

Libramiento Monterrey (Directo)

Monterrey-Nvo. Laredo (Directo)


pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los Monterrey-Ent. Ciénega dimensiones máximas de todas las de Flores vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los Ent. Ciénega de Floresdimensiones máximas de todas las La Gloria vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

Ent. (Carr. Mty-Laredo)Ent. (Carr. Victoria-Mty)

La Gloria-Nvo. Laredo

En el tramo T. Lib. De Nuevo Laredo II - Colombia se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma. En los tramos Nuevo Laredo - Ent. Lib. de Nuevo Laredo II y Colombia - Ent. Carr. (Monclova - Piedras Negras) deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo D.

56

Nvo. Laredo-Ent. (Monclova-Piedras Negras)

Carr.

57

Morelos-Cd. Acuña

Se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma.

58

Piedras Negras-Ent. (Carr. Morelos-Cd. Acuña)

Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "D".

59

Saltillo-Monclova

Para el tramo Santa Cruz-Monclova las características geométricas actuales permiten la circulación de los vehículos con las dimensiones y pesos máximos. De Santa Cruz a Saltillo, hay una autopista alterna tipo ET.

60

Monterrey-Castaños


pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los Mina-Ent. (Carr. Saltillodimensiones máximas de todas las Monclova) vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades

Monclova-Sabinas


pesos y unidades

63

Sabinas-Nueva Rosita


pesos y unidades

64

Nueva Rosita-Nava


65

Nava-Piedras Negras


61

62

Monclova-Piedras Negras

Ent. (Carr. Mty-Nvo. Laredo)-Mina

pesos y unidades

66

La Gloria-Colombia (Directo)

En construcción carretera de 12 m, se concluye en 2010

67

Ent. Huizache-Antiguo Morelos

68

Portezuelo-Palmillas (Ixmiquilpan-Entronque Autopista Querétaro)


69

Ent. Colonia-Cd. Valles

En el tramo Ent. Colonia - Ixmiquilpan se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de Ent. Colonia (Pachuca)- todas la Unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Portezuelo Norma. En el tramo Ixmiquilpan - Portezuelo se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

70

Toluca-Palmillas

Atlacomulco-Palmillas

71

Ent. Tula-Cd.Victoria


Se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B. En el tramo Ent. Tula - San Antonio se autoriza la

28

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. En el resto de la longitud deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "C".

CORREDOR 3 QUERETARO-CD. JUAREZ No.

Carretera

Tramo


72

Querétaro-Irapuato (Directo)

Querétaro - Celaya


73

Querétaro-León

Irapuato-León


74

León-Aguascalientes (Directo)

75

AguascalientesZacatecas

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Aguascalientes-Ent. Loreto


76

Ent. LoretoGuadalupe

En el tramo Ent. Loreto - Cosío se permite la circulación de los vehículos con las dimensiones y los pesos máximos. En el tramo Cosío - Ent. Arcinas se permitirá la circulación de TS y menores con especificaciones para caminos tipo D.

77

GuadalupeZacatecas


Zacatecas-Calera


79

Lib. Calera-Enrique Estrada (Directo)


80

Enrique EstradaProvidencia


81

Lib. de Fresnillo (Directo)


82

Fresnillo-Ent. La Chicharrona


78

83

Zacatecas-Durango

Ent. La ChicharronaCuencamé

Ent. La Chicharrona- Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones Rancho Grande máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Rancho Grande Cuencamé

84

- Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

85

Cuencamé-Gómez Palacio (Directo)


86

Gómez Palacio-Jiménez (Directo)


87

Jiménez-Chihuahua

88

89

90

Chihuahua-Cd. Juárez

Jiménez-Delicias (Directo)


Delicias-Chihuahua


ChihuahuaSacramento (Directo)


Sacramento-El Sueco

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones


DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

29

máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. 91

El Sueco-Villa Ahumada (Directo)


92

Villa Ahumada-Cd. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones Juárez máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

93

Cd. Juárez-Janos


94

Janos-Agua Prieta


95

El Sueco-Janos

96

Zacatecas-Saltillo

97

Zacatecas-Durango

98

Durango-Jiménez

En la carretera Parral Jiménez se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximos de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma. En la carretera Durango - Parral deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "D"

99

Guadalupe AguileraTepehuanes


100

Guadalajara-Zacatecas


101

Malpaso-San Cristóbal de la Barranca


102

Celaya-Ojuelos


103

Irapuato-Zapotlanejo

104

Galeana-Janos

Se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B. Se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

Ent. La Chicharrona- Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para Durango caminos tipo "D".

Irapuato-Pénjamo

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma

Pénjamo-Zapotlanejo

En los tramos Pénjamo - La Piedad y La Piedad - Est. Patty se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma. En el tramo Est. Patty Zapotlanejo deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "B".

CORREDOR 4 ACAPULCO-TUXPAN No.

Carretera

105

México-Cuernavaca (Directo)

106

Cuernavaca-Chilpancingo (Directo)

107

Chilpancingo-Acapulco (Directo)

108

México-Pachuca

México.- Ent. Tizayuca (Directo) Ent. TizayucaPachuca

109

110

Tramo

Pachuca-Tuxpan

Peso y Dimensiones que se podrán autorizar Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. El Tramo Pachuca-Tulancingo y Poza Rica - Tihuatlán se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. El Tramo Tulancingo –Poza Rica y Tihuatlán-Cañada Rica se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

30

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones Pirámides-Ent. (Carr. 112 máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas Pachuca-Tuxpan) en esta Norma. Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones 113 México-Tizayuca México-Izcalli Jardines máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma. En el tramo Izcalli Jardines - Ojo de Agua, se autoriza la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y menores, con Izcalli Jardines114 especificaciones para camino tipo B. En el tramo Ojo de Tizayuca Agua - Tizayuca, deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para camino tipo C. Se autoriza la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y menores, 115 Los Reyes-Zacatepec Los Reyes-Texcoco con especificaciones para camino tipo B Se autoriza la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y menores, 116 Texcoco-Apizaco con especificaciones para camino tipo B Apizaco-Lim. Edos. Se autoriza la circulación de vehículos TSR y menores, 117 Tlax./Pue. con especificaciones para camino tipo B Lim. Edos.Tlaxcala/ Se autoriza la circulación de vehículos TSR y menores, 118 Puebla-Zacatepec con especificaciones para camino tipo B Se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones Texcoco-Ecatepec (vía 119 máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas López Portillo) en la Norma. Venta de CarpioDeberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para 120 Teotihuacan caminos tipo B. CORREDOR 5 MEXICO- CHETUMAL 111

No.

Ent. Morelos-Ent. (Carr. Pachuca-Tuxpan)

Ent. MorelosPirámides (Directo)

Carretera

Tramo


121

México-Puebla (Directo)


pesos y unidades

122

Puebla-Córdoba (Directo)


pesos y unidades

123

Córdoba-Ent. (Directo)


pesos y unidades

124

Ent.La Tinaja-Cosoleacaque (Directo)


pesos y unidades

Coatzacoalcos-Villahermosa

En la carretera Coatzacoalcos-Villahermosa en los tramos Coatzacoalcos-Ent. La Venta y Est. ChontalpaVillahermosa se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

125

La

Tinaja

Coatzacoalcos-Nvo. Teapa

126

Se autorizará la circulación con los Nuevo Teapa-Ent. dimensiones máximas de todas las La Venta vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

127

Ent. La Venta-Arroyo Se autoriza la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y Hondo menores, con especificaciones para camino tipo B

128

129

Villahermosa-Escárcega

130

Villahermosa-Cd. del Carmen

pesos y unidades

Arroyo HondoVillahermosa


pesos y unidades

Villahermosa-Ent. Apto. Villahermosa


pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades


131

Cd. del Carmen-Campeche

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

Se autorizará la circulación con los Cd. del Carmendimensiones máximas de todas las Champotón vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

132

ChampotónHaltuchén

133

HaltuchénCampeche (Directo)

31

pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

Mérida-Progreso


pesos y unidades

138

Mérida-Puerto Juárez

Mérida-Kantunil


pesos y unidades

139

Mérida-Puerto Juárez

Kantunil-PuertoJuárez (Directo)


pesos y unidades

140


El tramo Villahermosa - Salto del Agua se autorizará la Villahermosa-Ent. El circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de Salto de Agua todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

141


142

Francisco EscárcegaChetumal

Se autorizará la circulación de T-S-R y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

143

Francisco EscárcegaChampotón


144

Ent. (Carr. EscárcegaChetumal)-Pto. Juárez

134

Campeche-Mérida

Campeche-Tenabo

135

Tenabo-Umán

136

Umán-Mérida

137

145

Ent. El Salto de Agua - Escárcega

Ent. (carr. Escárcega -Chetumal)-Ent. Mahahual


Ent. MahahualTulum

Se autorizará la circulación de T-S-R y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo C.

Tulum-Ent. Aeropuerto Cancún

146

En el tramo Ent. El Salto de Agua - Escárcega se autorizará la circulación de T-S-R y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

147

Ent. (Aut. México-Puebla)Ocotoxco (Directo)


pesos y unidades

148

Puebla-Atlixco (Directo)


pesos y unidades

149

Puebla-Santa Ana Chiautempan


pesos y unidades

150

Las Choapas-Ocozocuautla Las Choapas(Directo) Raudales


pesos y unidades

151

RaudalesOcozocuautla


pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

152

Ocozocuautla-Arriaga (Directo)

Arriaga-Tierra Libertad

y

32

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL

Acayucan-La Ventosa



pesos y unidades

153

Coatzacoalcos-Salina Cruz

154

Tuxtla Gutiérrez-Cd. Cuauhtémoc

San Cristóbal de las Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones Casas - Comitán para camino tipo C.

155

San Hipólito-Xalapa

En la carretera San Hipólito-Xalapa en su tramo Zacatepec- Xalapa se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma, en tanto se termina la construcción de la autopista Amozoc-Perote y del libramiento de Xalapa.

156

Ent. Carr. La TinajaCosoleacaque-San Andrés Tuxtla


pesos y unidades

CORREDOR 6 MAZATLAN-MATAMOROS No.

Carretera

Tramo


pesos y unidades

157

Tepic-Mazatlán

158

Villa Unión-Durango


159

Durango-Cuencamé (Directo)


pesos y unidades

160

CuencaméDirecto)


pesos y unidades

161

Torreón-Saltillo

Se autorizará la circulación con los Saltillo-Ent. Plan de dimensiones máximas de todas las Ayala vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades

Gómez

Mazatlán-Villa Unión


Palacio

162

Ent-. Plan de AyalaMatamoros Directo


pesos y unidades

163

Matamoros-Torreón


pesos y unidades

Monterrey-Ent. La Sierrita (Directo)


pesos y unidades

Ent. La SierritaReynosa


pesos y unidades pesos y unidades

164

Monterrey-Reynosa

165

166

Matamoros-Reynosa

Empalme-Reynosa


167

Matamoros-Reynosa

Matamoros-Empalme

Las características geométricas actuales permiten la circulación de los vehículos con las dimensiones y pesos máximos.

168

Saltillo-Monclova

Saltillo-Castaños


169

pesos y unidades

Castaños-Monclova

CORREDOR 7 M ANZANILLO-TAMPICO No.

Carretera

Tramo



DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

33

170

Manzanillo-Armería (Directo)


pesos y unidades

171

Colima-Ent. Armería


pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los Acatlán de Juárezdimensiones máximas de todas las Guadalajara vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

pesos y unidades

172

Acatlán de (Directo)

Juárez-Colima

173

Jiquilpan-Guadalajara

174

Guadalajara-Zapotlanejo (Directo)


pesos y unidades

175

Zapotlanejo-Lagos de Moreno (Directo)


pesos y unidades

176

San Luis Moreno

Potosí-Lagos

de

177

Ciudad Valles-San Luis Potosí

178

Cd. Valles-Tampico

179

San Luis Potosí-Ent. Arcinas

180

181

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y Lagos de Moreno- dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades Villa de Arriaga vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma en tanto se concluye la construcción de la autopista. En la carretera Cd. Valles-San Luis Potosí pueden circular los vehículos con los pesos y dimensiones establecidas para el tipo de C. En la carretera Cd. Valles - Tampico pueden circular los vehículos con los pesos y dimensiones establecidas para camino tipo B.

Libramiento Guadalupe (Ent. Arcinas-Zacatecas)

Morelia-Entronque-Carr. Maravatío - Zapotlanejo

Manzanillo-Tampico con Ramal a Lázaro Cárdenas y a Ecuandureo


pesos y unidades


pesos y unidades

Se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma en tanto se concluye la construcción de la autopista.

CORREDOR 8 VERACRUZ-ACAPULCO No.

Carretera


182

Veracruz-Ent. La Tinaja (Directo)


183

Ent. La Tinaja-Córdoba (Directo)


184

Córdoba-Puebla (Directo)


185

Puebla-México (Directo)


Puebla-Atlixco (Directo)


186

34

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


Atlixco-Jantetelco

Deberán circular los vehículos con especificaciones para caminos tipo "C".

188

Amozoc-Tecamachalco

En la carretera Puebla-Tehuacán, en el tramo Amozoc Tecamachalco se autorizará la circulación de vehículos TS y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

189

Jantetelco-Cuautla


190

La Pera-Cuautla (Directo)


191

Ent. (Aut. México-Puebla)-Ocotoxco


192

México-Cuernavaca (Directo)


193

Cuernavaca-Chilpancingo (Directo)


194

Chilpancingo-Acapulco (Directo)


Ent. La Tinaja-Santa Cruz (Tuxtepec)

En las carreteras La Tinaja-Santa Cruz y BuenavistaTuxtepec tramo Santa Cruz-Tuxtepec se autorizará la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y menores con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

187

195

CORREDOR 9 VERACRUZ-MONTERREY No.

196

197

Carretera

Tramo Cardel Veracruz (Directo)


Poza Rica-Cardel

En la carretera Poza Rica - Veracruz en el tramo Poza Rica - Ent. Totomoxtle, se autoriza la circulación de TSR y menores para camino tipo C; en tramo Totomoxtle Laguna Verde se autorizará la circulación de vehículos TSR y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B; en el tramo Laguna Verde Cardel se autorizará la circulación de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma.

Poza Rica-Veracruz

Pachuca-Tuxpan


Poza Rica-Tuxpan

En los tramos Pachuca - Tulancingo y Poza Rica Tihuatlán, se autoriza la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta norma. En los tramo Tulancingo - Poza Rica y Tihuatlán - Cañada Rica, se autorizará la circulación de T-S y menores con especificaciones para camino tipo B.

198

199


Tuxpan-Tampico

Tampico-Altamira


Altamira-Estación González

En la carretera Tampico-Cd. Mante en su tramo Est. Manuel-Est. González se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma en tanto se concluye la construcción del Libramiento de Estación Manuel.

Tampico-Cd. Mante


200

201

DIARIO OFICIAL

(Primera Sección)

35

Zaragoza - Cd.Victoria (Directo)


Cd. Victoria

En la carretera Cd. Victoria-Monterrey en su tramo Lim. Edos. Tamps/ N.L.-Monterrey se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

Cd.Victoria-Linares

-Monterrey Linares-Monterrey

202

Xalapa-Coatepec

Camino estatal

CORREDOR 10 PUEBLA-TAPACHULA No.

Carretera

Tramo


203

Puebla-Cuacnopalan (Directo)


204

Cuacnopalan-Huitzo (Directo)


205

Huitzo-Oaxaca (Libre)

Las características geométricas actuales no permiten la circulación de vehículos de especificaciones mayores a tipo B, pero existe una autopista alterna.

206

Oaxaca-Tehuantepec


207

La VentosaTapanatepec


208

Tapanatepec-Tuxtla Gutiérrez

209

TapanatepecOcozocuautla

En el tramo Las Cruces-Ocozocoautla se autorizará la circulación de vehículos T-S-R y menores, con especificaciones para caminos tipo B.

Ocozocuautla-TuxtlaGutiérrez

En el tramo Ocozocuautla-Tuxtla Gutiérrez, se autorizará la circulación con los pesos y dimensiones máximas de todas las unidades vehiculares autorizadas en esta Norma.

Tapanatepec-Arriaga


210 211

Tapanatepec-Talismán

Arriaga-Huixtla

212


Huixtla-Tapachula


Tapachula-Talismán


214

Tapachula-Ent. Jaritas


215

Ent. Jaritas-Pto. Madero


213

_____________________

36

(Primera Sección)

DIARIO OFICIAL


JOB

UNIT

274219

000


saimexicana

TPLB-SC-ML-03-993


Sh. 1 of 25 Rev.

0

Doc. class.: A

Unit: GENERAL

PACKING AND MARKING PROCEDURE Attachment 9 NOM-040-SCT-2-1995 – Norma Oficial Mexicana – Para el transporte de objectos induvusubles de gran peso y/o volume, peso y dimension de las combinaciones vehiculares y de las grùas industrials y su transito por caminos y puentes de jurisdicciòn federal

000-Za-e-09303_0 Packing and Marking Procedure

Recommend Documents